625567
1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/254
Pagina verder
Instruction manu
al
M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
©
2008 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny
Instruction manual
Congratulations
We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from
Dethleffs.
Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home"
out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that
you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy
years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly
functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics.
Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that
our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our prod-
ucts and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see
section 1.2).
This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important informa-
tion and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have
also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.
In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.
For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised spe-
cialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.
In the event of chassis-related problems with Dethleff vehicles, authorised workshops of the base vehicle man-
ufacturer are able to provide assistance. If you encounter problems on the Fiat chassis, please call the phone
number 00800 34281111.
We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.
Your Dethleffs team
Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
I
nstruction manual
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Conten
ts
1 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Guarantee certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Guarantee conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Inspection records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Inspection plan for annual
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.5 Inspection plan for water
ingress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van. . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1.2 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2 Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . 30
4.3.4 Roof load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space . . . . . 32
4.3.6 Double floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.7 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.8 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.5 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance
step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step. . . 35
4.6 PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.8 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.9 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.1 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.2 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . 43
5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.6 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism
for bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.8 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.9 Branch block (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.10 Electrical window winders (model I). . . 47
5.11 Electrically adjustable external
mirrors (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen,
driver's window and front
passenger's window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.13 Writing and reading rest . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.14 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.14.1 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.14.2 Fortero, Van. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.15 Filling washer fluid (model I) . . . . . . . . 51
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I) . . . . . . 51
5.17 Filling up with diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6 Pitching the motorhome. . . . . . 53
6.1 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.2 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.3 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4.2 Steady legs (Sawiko) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.5 240 V connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside
(with recessed handle). . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) . . . . 58
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob) . . 59
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside
(with locking lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . 60
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be
folded out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion
door, extendable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.1.11 Window of conversion door
(Hartal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.2 External flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . 63
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped. . . . . . . . . . 63
7.2.3 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.3 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
C
ontents
4
Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
7.4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock . . . . . . . . . 66
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . 66
7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic
hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . 70
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen,
driver's window and front
passenger's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.5 Skylights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1) . . . 72
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2) . . . 73
7.5.3 Hinged skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi) . . . . . . . . 75
7.5.5 Wind-up skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.6 Rotating seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.7 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg . . . . 77
7.7.2 Swivel table for the round seating
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.7.3 Fixed table (movable table-top) . . . . . . 80
7.7.4 Fixed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.7.5 Lift-off table for the round seating
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.8 Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.9 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.10 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.11 Extending the seating group . . . . . . . . 84
7.11.1 Extending the central seating
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.12 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.12.1 Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.12.3 Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.12.4 Bunk bed (side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.12.5 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 90
7.13 Converting seating groups for
sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.13.1 Central seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.13.2 Central seating group with
extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.13.3 Central seating group with divan . . . . . 93
7.13.4 Round seating group
(without slatted frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.13.5 Round seating group
(with slatted frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.13.6 Front bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.13.7 Front bench seat with divan. . . . . . . . . 97
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan
(extendable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.13.9 Front seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.2 Gas bottles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.3 Gas consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
8.4 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
8.5 Gas isolator taps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
8.6 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . .105
8.7 Duomatic switching facility . . . . . . . . .106
9 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . .109
9.1 General safety instructions. . . . . . . . .109
9.2 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
9.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
9.3.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
9.4 Charging the living area battery
and starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine . . .112
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . .112
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . .113
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.5.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.5.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.5.4 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220) . . . . .116
9.6.1 Battery separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.6.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.6.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
9.6.4 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.7 Panel IT 20-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage
and water or waste water levels . . . . .119
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.7.3 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.7.4 12 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.7.5 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.8 Panel IT 992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
9.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage
and water or waste water levels . . . . .122
9.8.2 Battery alarm for the living area
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
9.8.3 Current gauge for charging/
discharging the living area
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
9.8.4 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
9.8.5 12 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
9.8.6 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
9.8.7 Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . .125
9.9 Panel DT 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
9.9.1 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
9.9.2 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
9.9.3 Basic menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
9.9.4 Battery menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
9.9.5 Battery alarm for the living area
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
9.9.6 Battery capacity alarm for the
living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Conten
ts
9.9.7 Battery defect message for living
area battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.9.8 Tank menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.9.9 Tank alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.10 240 V power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.10.1 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.10.2 Power cable for external 240 V
connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.11 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.11.1 12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.11.2 240 V fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10 Appliances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the
right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 138
10.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater . . . . . . . 139
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . 141
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger . . . 148
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . 149
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and
waste water pipes
(winter comfort package). . . . . . . . . . 150
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit . . . . . . . 150
10.3 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.3.1 Dometic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.3.2 Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.4 Boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the
right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 155
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10.4.4 Alde boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10.5 Cooker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
10.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.5.4 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.5.5 Extractor hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
10.6 Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . 166
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series,
automatic ignition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with
automatic power selection and
frame heater). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.6.4 Operation (Thetford) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.6.5 Refrigerator door locking
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
11 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
11.1 Water supply, general . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
11.2 Switch for water pump
(winter comfort package). . . . . . . . . . 176
11.3 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11.3.1 Fresh water filler neck with lid . . . . . . 176
11.3.2 Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.3.3 Filling with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.3.4 Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
11.4 Waste water tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
11.4.1 Waste water tank
(models with double floor) . . . . . . . . . 179
11.4.2 Waste water tank
(models without double floor) . . . . . . 179
11.4.3 Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
11.5 Filling the water system . . . . . . . . . . . 180
11.6 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . . 181
11.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
11.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford) . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
11.8.3 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 185
11.8.4 Removing the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 186
11.8.5 Emptying the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.9 Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.9.1 Converting into a shower cubicle. . . . 188
11.9.2 Conversion to toilet compartment . . . 188
12 Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure
cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.1.4 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.1.5 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.1.6 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat
(model I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12.2 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12.3 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12.4 Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12.4.1 Toilet with separate water tank . . . . . 193
12.4.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 193
12.5 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12.5.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12.5.2 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12.5.3 At the end of the winter season . . . . . 194
12.6 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12.6.1 Temporary lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12.6.2 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.6.3 Starting up the vehicle after a
temporary lay-up or after lay-up
over winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
13 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.3 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 200
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid . . . . . . . . . . 200
C
ontents
6
Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system . . . . . . . 201
13.4 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . 201
13.5 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
13.5.1 Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.5.2 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent
tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws) . . . . 203
13.6.2 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
13.6.3 Halogen spotlight
(with glass shade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
13.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . 204
13.6.5 Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
13.6.6 Living area lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
13.6.7 Recessed halogen light
with housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
13.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat) . . . . . . . 206
13.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen light
driver's cabin (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . 206
13.6.10 Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
13.7 Changing the battery of the
wardrobe light with LED. . . . . . . . . . . 207
13.8 AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
13.9 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
13.10 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 209
13.11 Warning and information stickers. . . . 210
14 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.2 Tyre selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
14.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
14.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
14.6 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
14.6.1 Spare wheel support under the
vehicle (Renault) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
14.7 Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
15 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
15.1 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
15.2 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
15.3 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15.4 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15.4.2 Microwave oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15.5 Heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
15.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES . . . 223
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES
(error diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series
with AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
15.7 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
15.7.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
15.7.2 Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
15.8 Water supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . .227
15.10 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
16 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . .229
16.1 Weight details for special
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . .233
17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . .233
17.3 Speed limits and permissible
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
17.4 Driving with low beam in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away
from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
17.6 Gas supply in European countries . . .241
17.7 Toll regulations in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
17.8 Tips on staying overnight
safely during travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
17.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . .242
17.10 Travel checklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Guarantee
1
1Guarantee
1.1 Guarantee certificate
We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of
delivery. Special equipment is also listed that is not included in the standard
scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not
relate to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list
is valid.
Vehicle data
Model:
Car manufacturer/type of engine:
Serial number:
Initial registration:
Purchased from company:
Expiry of the guarantee period:
Key number:
Chassis number:
Customer Address
Surname, Christian name:
Street, No.:
Postal code, town:
Dealer's stamp and signature
8
Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Guarantee
1
1.2 Guarantee conditions
1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the
customer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six
years that the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a
manner that moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of
the vehicle.
The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper
handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been
properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding)
is not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the
correct repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling
expenses or other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.
2. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this
guarantee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective
vehicle part concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part,
depending on what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.
Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an author-
ised specialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
3. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented
once a year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The
presentation must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of
the initial registration (or delivery).
If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your
warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time.
As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated cou-
pons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection
stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signa-
ture of a respective Dethleffs dealer.
4. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the
vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and
is valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. A change of
ownership of the purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obliga-
tions. The guarantee expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not
complied with. The performance of guarantee work does not increase the
guarantee period.
5. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the
guarantee until the guarantee period expires.
6. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a
Dethleffs dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guar-
antee certificate and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be
included with the notification. If notification of leakage does not occur within
the time limit stated, no claims can be made under the terms of the guar-
antee.
Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs,
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral
expert whose decision is binding for all parties involved.
7. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guar-
antee.
8. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed
upon as the venue for jurisdiction.
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Guarantee
1
1.3 Inspection records
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
Delivery
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
1st year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 1st year
Water ingress test 1st year
No defects found
Found defects:
1
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
2nd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 2nd year
Water ingress test 2nd year
No defects found
Found defects:
3rd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 3rd year
Water ingress test 3rd year
No defects found
Found defects:
1
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
4th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 4th year
Water ingress test 4th year
No defects found
Found defects:
5th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 5th year
Water ingress test 5th year
No defects found
Found defects:
1
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Guarantee
1
1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test
Pos. Component Activity Interval
1 Skylights Remove the inside
frame of the skylights
and tighten the screw
connections of the se-
curing clips
1. year
2 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually
3 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually
4 Refrigerator, heater, boiler,
cooker, lighting, storage flap
and door closures, toilet, seat
belts
Function check Annually
5 Windows, skylights Function check, water
ingress test, applying
talc to the rubber seals
Annually
6 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually
7 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually
8 Water supply Water ingress test Annually
9 Hot-air system Function check, clean
fan wheel as necessary
Annually
10 Underbody protection, floor
skirt attachment
Visual check Annually
11 Pull-down bed suspension Function check Annually
12 Electrical system Function check Annually
13 Gas system Official gas inspection Every
two years
14 Connections between the
chassis and body
Check Every
two years
15 Underbody Visual check, repair un-
derbody protection as
necessary
Every
two years
Pos. Component Activity
1.1 Wheel housing Visual check
1.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.2.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.2.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.3.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.3.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Visual check
1
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Guarantee
1
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Visual check
1.6 Connection to driver's cabin Visual check
1.7 Base frame with base frame cut-outs Visual check
1.8 Check the status of the outer metal sheets Visual check
1.9 Check the status of the window rubbers, expan-
sion joints, sealing joints
Visual check
2.1 Measure the floor plateau at this connection
point with a moisture measuring device, write
down the corresponding values with the date of
the assessment. Prescribed maximum values –
up to 20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
2.2 Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sec-
tions, roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of
the decor. Prescribed maximum values – up to
20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
3.1 Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
Pos. Component Activity
1
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Guarantee
1
1
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Introduction
2
2Introduction
Please read this instruction manual completely before
using the vehicle for the first time!
Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users
of the safety regulations.
With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle
manuals and documents:
Dethleffs documents
Instruction manual and service book (housing body)
List of Dethleffs dealers
Additional documents
Operating and installation instructions of various appliances
Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer
Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations
This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe-
cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially
marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special
equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may
therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip-
tions.
However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not
described in this instruction manual.
Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.
Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.
Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the
instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed
invalid.
Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand
that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There-
fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con-
tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included
at the time of going to press is described.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to,
or inside the vehicle.
This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.
This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.
The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in
direction of travel.
All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".
The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.
1
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Introduction
2
The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted
without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.
2.1 General
The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the
recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and
the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual
are not followed.
Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc-
tions in the instruction manual.
Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be
immediately remedied by qualified personnel.
Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an
authorised specialist workshop only.
Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the
manufacturer.
The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and
accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross
weight.
Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.
2.2 Environmental tips
Be considerate of the environment.
Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to
be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside.
Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis-
posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro-
vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe
the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.
On board, collect waste water only in the built-in waste water tank or – if
necessary – in other containers designed for that purpose.
Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com-
pletely full (hygiene).
If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with
fresh water every time it is emptied.
Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty
the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the
level indicator lights up.
Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet
waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority
about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste
paper baskets which are situated at car parks.
Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this
purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of
rubbish on board.
When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When
running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The
running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
1
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Introduction
2
Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can
also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.
When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for
parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the
town or community authority about parking spaces.
Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.
1
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Introduction
2
1
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Safety
3
3Safety
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are
for the protection of persons and property.
The instructions address the following topics:
fire prevention and what to do in case of fire
general care of the vehicle
road safety of the vehicle
towing
gas system of the vehicle
electrical system of the vehicle
water system of the vehicle
3.1 Fire prevention
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks
3.1.2 Fire-fighting
3.1.3 In case of fire
Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.
Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical
system, gas system or appliances.
Always have a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle (with at least
1 kg capacity). The fire extinguisher must be approved, tested and close
at hand.
Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual-
ified personnel. Observe the date of testing.
The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.
Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.
Evacuate all passengers.
Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.
Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.
Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.
Keep escape routes clear.
Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.
2
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Safety
3
All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered
as emergency exits:
Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction
Opening angle at least 70°
Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm
Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm
3.2 General
3.3 Road safety
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing or the use of
the gas cooker or other appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be
replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options
(e.g. skylights with forced ventilation or mushroom-shaped vents) are
fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects
such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and
leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO
2
levels.
Observe the headroom of the doors.
As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the
base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals
are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed.
Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight
and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in
the vehicle papers.
Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa-
tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included
in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and
service centres.
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks
are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross
weight exceeding 4 tonnes.
When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and
windows are closed.
Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard
warning light when this is required by law.
The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which
is valid for the respective vehicle class.
When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle
and the fitted appliances.
Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi-
cating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
2
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Safety
3
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
Before commencing the journey, secure the hinged pull-down bed to the
roof using the retaining belt.
Before commencing the journey, open and secure the shades on the
windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place the television console in the
alcove to secure it from turning.
Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen
holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into
place. Close the TV cabinet.
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see
chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle
documents.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.
Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for
the respective height and weight.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
When driving through underpasses, tunnels, etc. observe the overall
height of the vehicle (refer to the technical data in the vehicle docu-
ments).
In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the
journey.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the
vehicle (see chapter 4).
When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to
load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible
gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).
2
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Safety
3
3.4 Towing
3.5 Gas system
3.5.1 General instructions
Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet
compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig-
erator door securing device.
Before commencing the journey, lower the table and fix it to the holder on
the floor of the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract
the corner steadies or steady legs which are fitted to the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.
During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten
the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect
them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.
Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over
time (see chapter 14).
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-
dent and injury!
No persons are to be between the motorhome and the trailer during posi-
tioning for connecting and detaching.
Close all gas isolator taps and the regulator tap before commencing the
journey and when leaving the vehicle.
No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler,
etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. We recommend having the gas pressure regulator checked
no later than every 10 years.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
2
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Safety
3
3.5.2 Gas bottles
Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Open a skylight before taking open sources of combustion (gas cooker)
into service.
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If the vehicle or gas devices are not used, close the regulator tap on the
gas bottle.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the gas bottle compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, no snow
walls or aprons may be allowed to lie against the vehicle. Keep the
intake openings under the floor of the vehicle open and clean.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
2
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Safety
3
3.6 Electrical system
3.7 Water system
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
C.
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles! Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices
and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the
mains.
Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. For this reason, rinse the water pipes
and the water tank thoroughly with several litres of fresh water before
each use of the vehicle. To do this, open all water taps. After each use
of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain
cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and
deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
2
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
4Before t he journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com-
mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
keys
registration
calculating the payload
correct loading of the vehicle
towing
retracting and extending the entrance step
PVC-floor covering
storing the television
using snow chains
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the
most important points.
4.1 Keys
The following keys are included with your vehicle:
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van
Two keys for
ignition lock
driver's and passenger's doors
fuel tank
Two keys for
conversion door of the body
fresh water filler neck (only with external fresh water filler neck)
external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case
of loss.
4.1.2 Model I
Two keys for
ignition lock
Two keys for
driver's door
fuel tank
conversion door of the body
fresh water filler neck
external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case
of loss.
2
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
4.2 Registration
Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national reg-
ulations on registration.
Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code
sticker in addition to the EU plate.
4.3 Payload
On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible
(directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving
characteristics of the vehicle.
Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with passengers) weighed on a public weighbridge
before you set out on your journey.
Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the
payload is high.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle
documents by the payload.
Built-in accessories, special equipment, the full water tank and the gas bot-
tles all reduce the payload.
Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.
Description Load (kg)
Maximum permitted
payloads
Motorhome roof rack 75
Bike rack Triple 50
Quadruple 60
Motorcycle rack 100
Sliding drawer 40
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5831) 150
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5881, A6971,
A6981, A6991, A7071)
250
Rear garage and rear storage space (all other models) 200
Overcab bed 200
Pull-down bed model I 200
Rear bed 200
Bunk beds 100
Folding beds 50
2
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
4.3.1 Terms
Maximum permissible
gross weight in a laden
condition
The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that
a vehicle may never exceed.
The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the
mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per-
missible gross weight in a laden condition.
Mass in ready-to-drive
condition
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive
standard vehicle.
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:
Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard
equipment
Driver's weight
Basic equipment weight
Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been
filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a filled fuel tank.
75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the
driver really weighs.
Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper
vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:
Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)
Gas bottles filled up to 90 %
A full heating system
A full toilet flushing system
The power cables for the 240 V power supply
The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used
The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-
drive conditions.
Payload The payload is made up as follows:
Conventional load
Additional equipment
Personal equipment
Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight".
However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better
understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for
fixed formulations.
All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.
Example for calculating
the basic equipment
Water tank with 100 l 100 kg
Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg
gas
+ 2 x 14 kg
bottle
) + 50 kg
Boiler with 10 l + 10 kg
240 V power cable + 4 kg
Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg
Total = 184 kg
2
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the
following text.
Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the pas-
sengers.
Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the
manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The
driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition
and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.
Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples
of additional equipment include:
Caravan coupling
Roof rail
Awning
Bike or motorcycle rack
Satellite unit
Microwave oven
Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they
may also be obtained from the manufacturer.
Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in
the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal
equipment can include the following:
Foodstuffs
Crockery
Television
Radio
Clothes
Bedding
Toys
Books
Toiletries
No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:
Animals
Bikes
Boats
Surfboards
Sports equipment
For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man-
ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol-
lowing formula:
Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L
Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manu-
facturer
L = total length of the vehicle in metres
2
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
4.3.2 Calculating the payload
The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between
Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and
Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.
The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per-
missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu-
facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.
Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles
and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual
payload be determined.
To do this, proceed as follows:
First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and
have it weighed.
Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have
it weighed.
The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the
correct loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is
the current weight of the vehicle.
The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross
weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.
This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equip-
ment:
Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for
the actual payload.
The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive
weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in
a laden condition must not be exceeded.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with passengers) weighed on a public weighbridge
before you set out on your journey.
Mass in kg to be
calculated
Calculation
Example for calculating
the payload
Maximum permissible gross weight ac-
cording to vehicle documents
3500
Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi-
tion, including basic equipment according
to vehicle documents
- 3070
This results in a permissible payload
of
430
Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each
weighing 75 kg
- 225
Additional equipment - 40
For the personal equipment this re-
sults in
= 165
3
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal
equipment.
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly
Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy
objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle
is exceeded.
However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circum-
stances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is
stored.
To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a cal-
culator and some time.
Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the
load on the axles:
Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle
Weight on the rear axle – G = weight on the front axle
Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm
G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg
R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm
For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross
weight in a laden condition.
Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle
loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-
carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).
Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle
due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear
extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is
a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg-
atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.
Store heavy objects (tent poles, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles.
Low-lying storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direc-
tion of travel and underfloor storage compartments or storage compart-
ments in the double floor are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.
Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front
wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back
wheel.
3
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
Calculating axle loads: Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with
the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result
by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage
compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage
compartment.
In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from
the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value
(example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this
value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load
on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too.
Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.
In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle
load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from)
the front axle load.
How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in
section 4.3.2.
If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be dis-
tributed in a different way.
If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is
reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive.
In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.
4.3.4 Roof load
Example 1 Example 2
Example calculation
Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)
Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)
Wheelbase of the vehicle R ÷ 325 (cm) ÷ 325 (cm)
Load on the rear axle
(add to the axle load)
138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)
Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)
Load relief to the front axle
(subtract from the axle load)
38.5 (kg)
Load on the front axle
(add to the axle load)
-11.5 (kg)
Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the
ladder at the rear to climb onto the roof.
Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping
when the ladder is moist or icy.
Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when
the roof is moist or icy.
Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate
as the roof load increases.
If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the
roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes).
Special girder systems are available as accessory. Your Dethleffs dealer
will be pleased to advise you.
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.
3
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
Rear ladder
Folding downwards:
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1) and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.
Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the
securing bracket (Fig. 1,5).
Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.
Folding upwards:
Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1).
Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed
part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).
Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.
Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space
The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the
roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a
smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.
Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.
Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.
The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall
height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thorough-
fares.
Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the rear garage/the rear storage space.
Depending on the model, the maximum permissible load for the rear
garage / rear storage space is between 150 kg and 250 kg. Do not
exceed the permissible rear axle load.
Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage
space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on
the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.
3
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
Moving the clamping
eyelets:
Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired
position.
Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping
eyelet sits tightly in the clamping rail again.
Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.
4.3.6 Double floor
4.3.7 Sliding drawer
Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets
are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure
loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing
nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders.
When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed
tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in
the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements
of the steering wheel or when braking.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage
1 Clamping eyelet
2 Clamping rail
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the double floor.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
3
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
4.3.8 Bike rack
Loading the bike rack with
bicycles
When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity
of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The
bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.
Loading the bike rack correctly:
Fold the bike rack downwards.
Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.
Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.
Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps
on the bike rack.
In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle on the retaining bracket or
retaining arm.
If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely
as possible to the rear wall.
4.4 Towing
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the bike rack.
Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle.
Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the
first 10 km and then at each break in the journey.
The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.
Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.
Before every journey, check:
Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?
Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack
belts?
No persons are to be between the motorhome and the trailer during posi-
tioning for connecting and detaching.
Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the
motorhome. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The
values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the docu-
ments of the vehicle and the caravan coupling.
Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the
overrun brake on.
Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted
incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the
instruction manual for the caravan coupling.
3
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
4.5 Entrance step
4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance step
Pulling out: Pull the entrance step forwards (Fig. 3,2) until it latches into place.
Pushing in:
Slightly lift the entrance step (Fig. 3,1).
Push the entrance step as far as it will go under the base of the vehicle
(Fig. 3,3). Ensure that the entrance step latches in place (Fig. 3,4).
4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being
retracted or extended.
Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There
is a risk of injury.
Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the
entrance step.
Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is
firm and even when exiting.
Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step
(see chapter 12).
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place,
a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 3 Mechanically operated
entrance step
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place,
a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.
3
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it (Fig. 4).
Operating switch The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle
in the area of the conversion door.
Extending:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 5,1) down until the entrance step has
extended completely.
Retracting:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 5,1) up until the entrance step has retracted
completely.
Emergency operation If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to
manually retract the entrance step:
Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.
Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object
(e.g. a screwdriver).
Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device
(e.g. a string).
Contact customer service.
4.6 PVC-floor covering
Fig. 4 Warning notice for entrance
step
Fig. 5 Operating switch entrance
step
Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-
floor covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.
Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick
can discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the
floor immediately.
3
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
4.7 Television
Storing the television in the
TV cabinet:
Rotate the television to its initial position (Fig. 6) and lock it into place.
Use handle (Fig. 6,1) to push the holder for the flat screen backwards. The
latch (Fig. 6,2) will engage.
Close TV cabinet.
4.8 Snow chains
The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual
countries.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen
holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into
place. Close the TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points
towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.
Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from
chapter 7.
Fig. 6 Television (flat screen) Fig. 7 Alternative: Television (flat
screen)
Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between
the tyres and the vehicle body.
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow
chains.
Only use snow chains approved by the manufacturer.
Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.
If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other),
mount the the snow chains to the outer tyres.
For vehicles manufactured by Ford with front-wheel drive: Snow chains are
only permitted if tyres of the size 195/75 R16 are mounted.
3
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.
After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.
4.9 Road safety
Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
No. Checks Checked
Base vehicle
1 All vehicle documents are on board
2 Tyres in proper condition
3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function
4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled
5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up
6 Brakes function
7 Brakes react evenly
8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane
Housing body, outside
9 Awning completely retracted
10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)
11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away
12 External supports removed
13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place
14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away
15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)
16 External flaps closed and locked
17 Conversion door locked
18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded
measured and noted. Keep the height information close at
hand in the driver's cabin
Housing body, inside
19 Windows and skylights closed and locked
20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the sup-
port and stored securely
21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)
22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position
23 Open storage spaces empty
24 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in
the roof cupboard of the awning light
25 Refrigerator door secured
26 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation
27 All drawers and flaps closed
3
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Before the journey
4
28 Living area doors and sliding doors secured
29 Pull-down bed fixed to roof with retaining belt pulled tight
30 Swivel seat locking device for driver's seat and front passen-
ger's seat locked
31 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts
32 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured
Gas system
33 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that
they are unable to turn
34 Protective cap set on top of the gas bottle
35 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are
closed
Electrical system
36 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery
(see chapter 9). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage
is too low, the respective battery will need to be recharged.
Observe the notes and instructions in chapter 9
Commence journey with fully charged starter and
living area batteries.
No. Checks Checked
4
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Before the journey
4
4
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
5During the journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.
The instructions address the following topics:
driving speed
brakes
seat belts
seats and headrests
the backrest adjustment mechanism for the bench
seating arrangement
branch block
electrical window winders
electrically adjustable external mirrors
Roman shades in the driver's cabin
writing and reading rest
bonnet
windscreen washer fluid container
checking the oil level
filling the tank
5.1 Driving the motorhome
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that
have seat belts mounted.
Never open your seat belts when travelling.
Passengers must remain in the seats provided.
The doors must remain locked.
Avoid braking with a jerk.
If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the
vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when
changing the destination.
Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the
journey.
Drive slowly on poor roads.
Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and
driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles
might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can
cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.
If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed,
Dethleffs will not be held responsible for damages caused.
The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.
If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically
switched on when driving in reverse gear.
4
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
5.2 Driving speed
5.3 Brakes
Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:
Do the brakes function?
Do the brakes react evenly?
Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?
5.4 Seat belts
Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point
safety and/or lap belts in the living area. National regulations apply seat-belt
fastening.
The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are
sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables
a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.
The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross-
wind can be especially dangerous.
Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.
Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road condi-
tions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of
safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving
situation and environment.
Adhere to the national legal speed limits.
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an
authorised specialist workshop.
Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the
belt clips.
Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in
order to ensure that they are correctly seated.
Only use one seat belt for one adult person.
Do not belt in objects together with persons.
Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In
these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
4
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly
The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body
and the seat belt.
5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti)
Rotating seats into
driving position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
After an accident, replace the seat belts.
During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise
the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.
Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the
body.
When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position.
The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not
to be rotated.
The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle,
depending on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of
the seats is described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.
Fig. 8 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
1 Lengthways adjustment
2 Armrest adjustment
3Rotating
4 Backrest adjustment mechanism
Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
4
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 8,2) in an anticlockwise direction (when
viewed from the front). The latch of the armrest is released by this.
Move the armrest to the desired position.
Turn the knurled wheel as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
The position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be adjusted. The
handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the front, right or
left of the seat.
Pull the handle (Fig. 8,1). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Turn the knurled knob (Fig. 8,4). The angle of the backrest can be
adjusted.
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI)
Rotating seats into
driving position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
For ease in handling, first move the armrest slightly upward.
For fine adjustments, turn the handwheel (Fig. 9,1) upwards or downwards.
Fig. 9 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
1 Armrest adjustment
2 Lengthways adjustment
3 Height adjustment
4 Rotating
5 Backrest adjustment mechanism
Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
4
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
Both the height and the position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can
be adjusted. The handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to
the front, right or left of the seat.
Pull the handle (Fig. 9,2). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Pull the handle (Fig. 9,5). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.
Pull the handle (Fig. 9,3). The seat can be lifted or lowered toward the front.
5.6 Headrests
Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 10,1) so that the
back of the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests
upwards or downwards by hand.
The backrest is under strong spring tension. If there is no resistance to
the backrest, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.
If the backrest quickly moves forward uncontrolled it can damage the seat-
belt lock.
The headrests are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 10 Bench with adjustable head-
rests
4
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism for bench
The inclination of the backrest can be adjusted with the backrest adjustment
mechanism "Travel Lounge".
Pull or press the bar (Fig. 11,1) under the seat (Fig. 11,3) upwards and
hold it in this position.
Push the seat on the rails (Fig. 11,2) to the desired position or carefully pull
it forwards as far as it will go.
Let go of the bar and move the seat forwards or backwards slightly until the
seat can be heard to lock into place.
5.8 Seating arrangement
Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 12).
If the vehicle is equipped with the backrest adjustment, the bench cannot
be converted into a bed.
Fig. 11 Backrest adjustment mecha-
nism for bench
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The
authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fig. 12 "Seat" symbol
4
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
5.9 Branch block (model I)
The sliding regulator (Fig. 13,2) for the branch block (Fig. 13,1) is located on
the outside left of the dashboard.
Vehicle heating is coupled with room heater by the sliding regulator. Therefore
the windscreen is heated when the vehicle is at a standstill.
During mobile operation, close the branch block (slide the sliding regulator all
the way down) so that the complete power of the vehicle heater can reach to
the front and side panes.
5.10 Electrical window winders (model I)
There is an electrical window winder (Fig. 14) on the driver's side of the
vehicle.
Opening:
Press lower part of the switch (Fig. 14,2).
Closing:
Press upper part of the switch (Fig. 14,1).
Fig. 13 Branch block
Remove hands and other objects from the window before closing.
Even if you leave your vehicle just briefly, remove the ignition key from
the steering lock. Otherwise children may be able to operate the window
winder and injure themselves.
Fig. 14 Switch for electrical window
winder
4
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
5.11 Electrically adjustable external mirrors (model I)
Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjust-
able and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment
and the mirror heater are on the dashboard.
Adjusting:
Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, turn the rotary switch (Fig. 15,1)
to the left or right.
Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 15,1) in the appropriate direc-
tion.
Switching on the heater:
Press the switch (Fig. 15,2). The switch indicator lamp shows it is in oper-
ation.
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and
front passenger's window
Securing the Roman shade
for the windscreen:
Use the handle (Fig. 16,2 and Fig. 17,1) to pull the two halves of the
Roman shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go.
Push the locking knobs (Fig. 16,1) upward or downward. If the red dot is
visible, the lock is open.
Fig. 15 Switch for electrically adjust-
able external mirrors and
mirror heater
While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window
and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and
secured.
Fig. 16 Lock for the Roman shade of
the windscreen
Fig. 17 Lock for the Roman shade of
the windscreen (model I)
4
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
Securing the Roman shade
for the driver's / front
passenger's window:
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the
handle (Fig. 18,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.
5.13 Writing and reading rest
Depending on the model, the motorhome is equipped with a writing and
reading rest (Fig. 19).
5.14 Bonnet
Fig. 18 Locking mechanism for Roman
shades on driver's/front pas-
senger's windows
During the journey the writing and reading rest must be closed.
If there is a passenger airbag, the writing and reading rest is locked so it
cannot be opened.
Fig. 19 Writing and reading rest
When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compart-
ment.
Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot.
Danger of burns!
Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.
The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey.
After closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this
out, pull on the bonnet.
5
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
5.14.1 Model I
Opening: Pull the lever (Fig. 20,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle on the
dashboard. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.
Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook
(Fig. 21,1). Do this by reaching behind the plate (Fig. 21,2) and pulling it
forward.
Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and upwards.
Closing:
Move the bonnet in an arch downwards and backwards until the latch locks
audibly in place.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
5.14.2 Fortero, Van
Opening: Insert the ignition key (Fig. 22,3) in the locking cylinder (Fig. 22,1) in the
radiator grille (Fig. 22,2).
Press in the ignition key and turn it one quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction. The bonnet is unlatched.
Turn the ignition key back in a clockwise direction past the central position.
The bonnet is open and swings upward.
Turn the ignition key back to the central position (Fig. 22) and remove it.
Closing:
Move the bonnet downwards until the catch lock engages audibly.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
Fig. 20 Release knob on the inside of
the bonnet
Fig. 21 Release knob on the outside of
the bonnet
Fig. 22 Bonnet release mechanism
Fortero, Van
5
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
During the journey
5
5.15 Filling washer fluid (model I)
Unlock and open the bonnet.
Remove the lid (Fig. 23,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
Slowly fill in washer fluid.
Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I)
The oil dipstick (Fig. 24,1) is located behind the front crossbeam. The oil dip-
stick is marked in red.
Fig. 23 Washer fluid container filler
neck
Fig. 24 Oil dipstick (I model)
1 Oil dipstick
5
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
During the journey
5
5.17 Filling up with diesel
The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.
Opening:
Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 25,1) and turn it in an anticlock-
wise direction.
Remove cap.
Closing:
Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.
Turn key in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.
No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler,
etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
The cap for the fuel filler neck and for the fresh water filler neck are very
similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".
Fig. 25 Cap for the fuel filler neck
5
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6Pitching the motorhome
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
handbrake
entrance step
wheel chocks
operation of the supports
240 V connection
refrigerator
6.1 Handbrake
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
6.2 Entrance step
In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.
6.3 Wheel chocks
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are
provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight
exceeding 4 tonnes.
6.4 Supports
6.4.1 General instructions
Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling.
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for
damages or animal traces after pitching.
If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and
apply it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing
the handbrake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.
Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for
stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.
When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.
Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract
and secure them.
When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order
to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.
5
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Pitching the motorhome
6
6.4.2 Steady legs (Sawiko)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of
the steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 26,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 26,4)
out of the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5).
Pull out the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the
ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 26,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is clear of the ground.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 26,4)
out of the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 26,5) and insert the splint
(Fig. 26,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 26,1) until the steady leg has swung
upwards and the guide (Fig. 26,2) has reached the very end of the slot
(Fig. 26,3).
Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used
to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for
turning.
Fig. 26 Steady leg
Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs
and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the
splint?
5
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of
the steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 27,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
Remove the splint (Fig. 27,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5).
Extend the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the
ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 27,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is clear of the ground.
Remove the splint (Fig. 27,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 27,5) and insert the splint
(Fig. 27,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 27,1) with the socket spanner until the
steady leg has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 27,3) has com-
pletely retracted into the notch (Fig. 27,2).
6.5 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).
6.6 Refrigerator
The 12 V operation of the refrigerator is only possible when the vehicle engine
is running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to
240 V operation or gas operation.
Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used
to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for
turning.
Fig. 27 Steady leg
Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs
and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the
splint?
5
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Pitching the motorhome
6
5
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7Living
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
opening and closing the doors and external flaps
ventilation of the vehicle
opening and closing the windows and blinds
opening and closing the skylights
rotating the seats
modifying the table surfaces
converting tables
positioning the television
adjusting the halogen spotlights
light switches
extending the seating groups
use of the beds
7.1 Doors
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 28,2). The door is open.
Only drive with locked doors.
Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g.
during an accident.
Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights.
However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers
to enter the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.
Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's
doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of
the driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the oper-
ating manual of the base vehicle.
Fig. 28 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
5
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 28,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (with recessed handle)
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 29,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 29,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 29,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 30,2) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 30,1). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 30,2) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 29 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
Fig. 30 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
5
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob)
Opening: Turn the knob in an anticlockwise direction (Fig. 31,1). The door lock is
unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the door knob approx. 45° in a clockwise direction (Fig. 31,2) and
leave in this position (Fig. 32).
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside (with locking lever)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 33,1). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 33,2) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 33,2).
Fig. 31 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, open
Fig. 32 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, locked
Fig. 33 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
6
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 34,1). The door lock is unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the safety knob (Fig. 34,2) in a clockwise direction.
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 35,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
Fig. 35 Door lock of driver's door, out-
side
6
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 36,2). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 36,1) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 36,1).
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be folded out
An insect screen door is integrated in the conversion door. The insect screen
door can be opened outward. In the process the conversion door stays open.
Extending:
Fully open the conversion door and fix to the exterior wall.
Depending on the model, turn the latch (Fig. 37,1 or Fig. 38,3) a quarter
turn or push it back.
Open the insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 38,1) in the direction of the arrow for stabilisation.
Fully close insect screen door and push latch (Fig. 38,3) in the direction of
the arrow.
Retracting:
Unlatch insect screen door. To do this, push the latch (Fig. 38,3) in the
opposite direction of the arrow.
Open insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 38,1) in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Fold in the insect screen door. The latching (Fig. 38,2) engages.
Press the insect screen door on the conversion door and, depending on the
model, (Fig. 37,1 or Fig. 38,3) turn the latch one quarter turn or slide it into
the holder on the frame.
Fig. 36 Door lock of driver's door,
inside
Fig. 37 Insect screen door, closed Fig. 38 Insect screen door, opened out
6
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion door, extendable
Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 39,1).
Opening:
Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 39,1).
7.1.11 Window of conversion door (Hartal)
The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.
Closing:
Grasp the Roman shade (Fig. 40,2) using the holding bar (Fig. 40,1), pull
it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will
stay at this height.
Opening:
Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.
Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.
Fig. 39 Insect screen
Fig. 40 Roman shade
6
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.2 External flaps
The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin-
ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle
Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 41,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap
lock is unlatched.
Remove the key.
Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 41,2). The external flap is open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is
locked.
Remove the key.
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted
to the external flap.
When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.
To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular
external flap at the same time.
Fig. 41 Flap lock with recessed handle
During rain, water can penetrate the opened flap lock. Therefore close the
lock handle.
6
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 42,1) and turn a quarter turn in an anti-
clockwise direction. The lock handle (Fig. 42,2) snaps out.
Remove the key.
Turn lock handle one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The flap
lock is open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Turn lock handle in a clockwise direction until it is horizontal. The flap lock
is now engaged but not locked.
Insert key into locking cylinder.
Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn in a
clockwise direction. The lock handle will stay bolted.
Remove the key.
7.2.3 Sliding drawer
Opening: Open the flap lock (Fig. 43,2) as described above.
Pull out the sliding drawer.
Loosen the tension belts (Fig. 43,1).
Fig. 42 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped,
closed
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Always fasten the boxes with the tension belts before commencing the
journey.
Fig. 43 Sliding drawer
6
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.3 Ventilation
Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and
efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation is
not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a pleasant living cli-
mate is created if heating output, air distribution and ventilation are synchro-
nized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and set the
air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation. If the vehicle is laid up for
a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, especially in summer as heat
accumulation can occur.
7.4 Windows
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of
gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced
on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g.
skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents)
are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the
inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-
tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due
to increased CO
2
levels.
Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions,
condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the
floor).
Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-
shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).
The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason,
close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.
Before commencing the journey, close the windows.
Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which
are fitted to the hinged window.
When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.
In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a
light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The
glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the
external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed
acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.
6
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock
Opening: Pull out the lock (Fig. 44,1).
Press handle (Fig. 44,2) and push it forward or backward at the same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as it can go.
Push in the lock.
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock
Opening: Press handle (Fig. 45,1) and push or pull it forward or backward at the
same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges
Fig. 44 Sliding window with slide lock
Fig. 45 Sliding window
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional
forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
6
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and
use knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) to secure in position.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Turn knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) until the latch is released.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame.
The locking catch (Fig. 46,2) is located on the inside of the window catch
(Fig. 46,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in 2 positions:
"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 48)
Firmly closed (Fig. 46)
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 48,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
Return the catch lever to its initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 48,2)
has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 48,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-
dows completely.
Fig. 46 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 47 Hinged window with rotary
hinges, open
Fig. 48 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
6
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic hinges
Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic
hinge (Fig. 50,1) locks in place automatically.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame.
The locking catch (Fig. 49,2) is located on the inside of the window catch
(Fig. 49,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:
"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51)
Firmly closed (Fig. 49).
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is
not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of
the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional
forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
Fig. 49 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 50 Hinged window with automatic
hinges, open
Fig. 51 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
6
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
Turn the catch lever a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking
catch (Fig. 51,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch
(Fig. 51,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-
dows completely.
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen
The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect
screen can be adjusted separately.
Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards. If the blind is to be com-
pletely closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated
on both sides of the window frame.
Opening:
If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards and,
at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the
locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame.
If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 52,2) slightly
downwards until the locking device releases.
Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.
Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed,
vibrations can damage the spring shaft.
Fig. 52 Hinged window
7
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 52,1) down and hang it into the
locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.
Opening:
Press handle (Fig. 52,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly
inward. The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated
on both sides of the window frame.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen
Roman shade The Roman shade (Fig. 53,3) is permanently connected to the insect screen
(Fig. 53,1).
Closing:
Hold the Roman shade in the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 53,4) and care-
fully draw it downwards.
Release the Roman shade at the desired position. The Roman shade will
stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly return the Roman shade to its initial position with the bottom rod
(Fig. 53,4).
Insect screen The insect screen is permanently connected to the Roman shade. When the
insect screen is opened, the Roman shade is opened along with it.
Closing:
Hold the insect screen at the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 53,2) and care-
fully pull it downward as far as it goes.
Opening:
Slowly return the insect screen on the bottom rod of the Roman shade
(Fig. 53,4).
Fig. 53 Sunroof
7
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front
passenger's window
Closing: On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs
(Fig. 54,1) upwards or downwards. If the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
Grasp the handle (Fig. 54,2 and Fig. 55,2) of the Roman shades and draw
carefully until the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.
Opening:
Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.
On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs upwards
or downwards. As long as the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the
handle (Fig. 55,2) onto the cap (Fig. 55,1). The Roman shade is secured.
7.5 Skylights
Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted
to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti-
lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.
Fig. 54 Roman shade for the wind-
screen
Fig. 55 Roman shades for driver's
window and front passenger's
window
The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never
cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat.
Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.
The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the
blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight
slightly or move it to ventilation position.
7
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1)
Depending on the model, there is a skylight built in with forced ventilation
(Fig. 56,1) in the living area and in the toilet compartment.
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 57,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 57,1) downward.
Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 58,2) towards the inside of the skylight.
At the same time use the handle (Fig. 58,1) to press the skylight upwards.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 57,1) until it latches in place.
Closing:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 57,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 57,1) downward.
Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
Do not climb on the skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.
Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and
locked.
Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.
Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.
When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.
Fig. 56 Forced ventilation
Fig. 57 Insect screen Fig. 58 Skylight, handle
7
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Using both handles (Fig. 58,1), pull down the skylight with force until the
two snap latches lock into place.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 57,1) until it latches in place.
Blind To close and open the blind:
Closing:
Pull the blind (Fig. 59,1) using the handle (Fig. 59,2) and hook the hooks
(Fig. 59,3) in the opening (Fig. 59,4).
Opening:
Pull the hooks (Fig. 59,3) out of the opening (Fig. 59,4) and guide the blind
back.
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2)
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 60,2) with the handle (Fig. 60,1). The
insect screen folds down.
Press the skylight up using both handles (Fig. 60,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 60,4).
Closing:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 60,2) with the handle (Fig. 60,1). The
insect screen folds down.
Pull down the skylight with force using both handles (Fig. 60,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 60,4).
Fig. 59 Blind
Fig. 60 Skylight with snap latch
(variant 2)
7
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.5.3 Hinged skylight
The hinged skylight may be opened on one side only. Three inclination angles
and a ventilation position are available.
An extension hook is included as standard equipment.
Opening:
Turn the lever (Fig. 61,1 or Fig. 62,3) one quarter turn.
Grip lever and push hinged skylight upwards.
Closing:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 61,4) must slide into the
lower aperture (Fig. 61,3).
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 61,4) must slide into the
upper aperture (Fig. 61,2).
Roman shade The Roman shade may be closed at any position, either with the hinged sky-
light open or closed.
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade (Fig. 62,1) and release in the required position. The
Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen
Closing:
Pull insect screen (Fig. 62,2) out until it engages with the latch on the oppo-
site side.
Opening:
Slightly push up insect screen along the strip. The latch is released.
Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.
Fig. 61 Hinged skylight, lock Fig. 62 Hinged skylight
If it rains and the hinged skylight is in ventilation position, that could lead to
water penetrating the living area. Therefore close hinged skylight com-
pletely.
The insect screen may be damaged if it is closed with the hinged skylight
closed. Therefore only close the insect screen when the hinged skylight is
open.
7
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi)
The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.
Opening:
Press the safety knob (Fig. 63,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 63,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) in the guides (Fig. 64,2) to the rearmost position
(Fig. 64,3).
Closing:
Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 64,1) slightly upwards.
Push the bar back in the guides.
Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob
(Fig. 63,2).
Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position
(Fig. 65,1) and central position (Fig. 65,2). Depending on the model, the sky-
light can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 66,1).
Press the safety knob (Fig. 63,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 63,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 64,2) to the desired position.
Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 65,1 or 2)
and lock if necessary.
Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position.
The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Fig. 63 Safety knob on the Heki sky-
light
Fig. 64 Heki skylight, guide
Fig. 65 Heki skylight in ventilation
position
Fig. 66 Ventilation position locking
mechanism
7
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:
Closing:
Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman
shade.
Opening:
Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.5.5 Wind-up skylight
The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.
Opening:
Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 67,2) until a resistance can be felt (max.
opening angle 70°).
Closing:
Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up sky-
light can be locked after rotating two or three more times.
Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the
acrylic glass.
Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman
shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along
on closing the Roman shade.
Closing:
Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 67,3) and release in the desired
position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also
moved along on closing the insect screen.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 67,1) to the opposite handle of the
Roman shade (Fig. 67,3) and allow to engage.
Opening:
Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 67,1) at the back upwards and
detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 67,3).
Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.
Fig. 67 Wind-up skylight
7
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.6 Rotating seats
Depending on the model, the lever for turning the seats is located at the front
of the seat or on the left or right side.
Turning:
Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Push or pull the lever (Fig. 68,3 or Fig. 69,4) to turn the seat. The seat is
released from the locking device.
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
7.7 Tables
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg
The suspension table size can be enlarged by inserting a table-top extension.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.
Fig. 68 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
Fig. 69 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
Depending on the model, different table-top extensions and fold-out legs
are used. Therefore the table can deviate from the type shown here. The
principle of the conversion is the same for all tables.
Fig. 70 Extend suspension table
7
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Extending: Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 70,2).
Lift the table-top slightly and pull out it out as far as possible. The table
extension (Fig. 70,1) is fully extended.
Set down the table.
Insert the table-top extension in the table extension.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 70,2).
Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull out.
Remove the table-top extension and store it securely.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible. The table
extension (Fig. 70,1) is fully retracted.
Set down the table.
Tighten the knurled screws.
The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 71,1) by approx. 45°.
Fold the lower part of the fold-out leg (Fig. 71,3) by 90°. Depending on the
model, pull the lower part of the fold-out leg down or push the release knob.
Press the release knob (Fig. 72,1) on the lock (Fig. 71,4).
Swivel the table-top approx. 45° upward and remove the table from the
retainer.
Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 71,2) into
the holders (Fig. 71,5) on the bottom side of the table.
Insert the table into the lower retainer and lock it.
Fig. 71 Bed foundation Fig. 72 Lock
7
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.7.2 Swivel table for the round seating group
Fastening to the floor: Place the swivel table next to the holder (Fig. 73,3) or on the holder
(Fig. 74,2).
Place the bar (Fig. 73,2) with the securing bolt (Fig. 73,1) over the table
leg.
Move the bar and possibly also the swivel table in such a way that the
securing bolt (Fig. 73,1 or Fig. 74,1) can be screwed into the holder
(Fig. 73,3 or Fig. 74,2).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
The swivel table's swivel mechanism enables it to be used as a bed founda-
tion.
Conversion to bed
foundation (swivel table with
clamp):
Push the handle (Fig. 75,2) upwards.
Swivel the table-top (Fig. 75,1) down with a circular movement until the
handle locks into place.
Conversion to bed
foundation (swivel table
without clamp):
Rotate the handle (Fig. 76,2) into the horizontal position.
Swivel the table-top (Fig. 76,1) downward in a circular movement.
Turn the handle back to the vertical position. The swivel mechanism is
locked.
Lock the swivel table in position before commencing the journey.
Fig. 73 Lock for swivel table with
clamp
Fig. 74 Lock for swivel table without
clamp
Fig. 75 Lock for swivel table with
clamp
Fig. 76 Lock for swivel table without
clamp
8
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.7.3 Fixed table (movable table-top)
The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Undo the knurled screw (Fig. 77,2).
Move the table-top (Fig. 77,3) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
Moving in a crossways
direction:
Undo the knurled screw (Fig. 77,1).
Move the table-top (Fig. 77,3) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.
7.7.4 Fixed table
Fastening to the floor: Place the fixed table with the perforated plate (Fig. 78,2) on to the holder
(Fig. 78,3).
Move the fixed table in such a way that the securing bolt (Fig. 78,1) can be
screwed into the holder (Fig. 78,3).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
Fig. 77 Fixed table (movable table-top)
Lock the fixed table in position before commencing the journey.
Fig. 78 Locking mechanism for fixed
table
8
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
The table-top of the fixed table can be moved lengthways or folded to the side.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).
Shift the table-top.
Lock the table-top with the fixing screws.
Folding the table-top to the
side:
Remove the fixing screw (Fig. 79,1).
Fold the table-top to the side.
Depending on the model, the table top of the fixed table can be enlarged.
Extending:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Insert the table-top extension (Fig. 80,1).
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 79,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Remove the table-top extension (Fig. 80,1) and store it securely.
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Fig. 79 Fixed table (from below)
Fig. 80 Extending the fixed table
8
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.7.5 Lift-off table for the round seating group
The lift-off table's lifting mechanism permits it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 81,3) to the left. The lock is open.
Press the table-top (Fig. 81,2) in the middle downwards to the desired stop
limit (Fig. 81,1 or 4) and hold it down.
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 81,3) to the right. The lift-off table is locked.
7.8 Television
Flat screen in the TV
cabinet
The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.
Pulling the television
console forward:
Press the release knob (Fig. 82,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen for-
ward as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 82,4).
The lift-off table is not secured to the floor. Before the journey, lower the lift-
off table to the top limit and secure to the benches with the straps provided.
Fig. 81 Lift-off table for the round
seating group
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, turn the flat screen and the screen
holder back to the basic position and slide them in until they lock into
place. Close the TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents!
Fig. 82 TV cabinet
8
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Swivelling the television
console:
Pull the release knob (Fig. 82,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 82,2) to the
desired position.
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 82,3).
Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.
Flat screen with jointed
arm
The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.
Positioning the flat screen
with jointed arm:
Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 83,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 83,2).
Swivel flat screen (Fig. 83,1) into the required position.
Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and
set the desired angle of inclination.
7.9 Lamps
Turning spotlight: Grasp the housing (Fig. 84,2) and turn it.
The housing can be turned in different directions:
To the left and to the right
Up and down
Fig. 83 Flat screen with jointed arm
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.
Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching
them.
If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis-
tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable
objects. Fire hazard!
Fig. 84 Spotlight
8
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Shifting spotlight: Grasp the holder (Fig. 84,1).
Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.
7.10 Light switch
Depending on the model, there is a light switch for lighting the entrance at the
bottom of the entrance area (Fig. 85,1).
7.11 Extending the seating group
7.11.1 Extending the central seating group
Extend the table (Fig. 86,3) (see section 7.7).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 86,8) and open the flap (Fig. 86,4).
Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 87,7) and wedge together with the flap
(Fig. 87,4).
Place the back cushions (Fig. 87,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 87,2) on
the bench seat extension.
The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light
switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to
the lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.
Fig. 85 Light switch for lighting
entrance
Fig. 86 Before extending
Fig. 87 After extending
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4Flap
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
7 Bench seat extension
8 Handle
8
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 87,6) between the seat cushions and
the exterior wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 87,5) between the back cushions and
the exterior wall.
7.12 Beds
7.12.1 Overcab bed
Access ladder Always use the access ladder (Fig. 88,4) provided as standard to access the
overcab bed.
Attaching:
Attach the ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 88,5) on the alcove panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 88,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 88,1) to the holders on the ceiling
(Fig. 88,2).
Folding mechanism Depending on the model, the overcab bed can be folded upwards. This sim-
plifies passage from driver's cabin to living area.
The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.
Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can
break!
Fig. 88 Overcab bed
8
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Folding upwards: Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 89,1) upwards. The overcab bed is
kept in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.
Folding downwards:
Pull overcab bed downwards.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I)
Preparing the driver's
cabin
Depending on equipment, the driver's and front passenger's seats have to be
adjusted in different ways before lowering the pull-down bed.
Variant 1 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are not equipped with headrests (no safety package).
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat to the direction of
vehicle travel, lock them in place and move them backwards.
Fold the backrest back.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Fig. 89 Overcab bed, folded upwards
The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When
the bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for
two persons in it.
Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed to the roof
using the retaining belt. Tighten the retaining belt firmly.
Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when
the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is
pushed up. Fire hazard!
Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring ten-
sion. If there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly
moves forward after unlocking.
8
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
Variant 2 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on
driver's and front passenger's seats can be removed.
Remove the headrests.
Turn the driver's seat to the direction of travel, lock it in place and move it
backwards.
Fold the backrest of the passenger's seat back.
Push the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the backrest back com-
pletely.
Turn the front passenger's seat in the opposite direction to the direction of
travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Variant 3 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on
driver's and front passenger's seats can not be removed.
Push the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the
backrest back completely.
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat in the opposite direc-
tion to the direction of travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered com-
pletely.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Lowering the pull-down bed:
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.
Undo the retaining belt (Fig. 90,5) at the roof (Fig. 90,2).
Swing the pull-down bed down in a circle until it locks into place audibly.
Folding the pull-down bed
up:
Switch off the reading lamps on the ceiling above the pull-down bed.
Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under
the mattress.
Use both hands to push the pull-down bed upwards.
Secure the pull-down bed to the roof (Fig. 90,2) by means of the retaining
belt (Fig. 90,5).
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down
bed.
Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets
into the U-bolts (Fig. 90,4).
Fig. 90 Pull-down bed
8
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
Safety net The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame.
Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 90,1) to the holders (Fig. 90,3) on the
ceiling.
7.12.3 Bunk bed
Depending on the model, the rear area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed
can also be used as a rear garage.
Converting the bunk bed
into the rear garage:
Pull on the loop (Fig. 91,3) and release the latch (Fig. 91,1).
Pull the slatted frame (Fig. 91,2) together with the mattress forward until it
latches in place.
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 92,3) on the panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 92,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the person is already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 92,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Fig. 91 Bunk bed (rear)
Fig. 92 Safety net
8
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.12.4 Bunk bed (side)
Depending on the model, the side area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed
can also be used as a storage area.
Converting the storage area
to a bunk bed:
Open the storage flap and fold out the support leg (Fig. 93,2) under the
bed.
Pull the loop (Fig. 93,1) and tilt the bed (Fig. 93,3) downwards.
Take the mattress (Fig. 94,3) off the top bed and place it on the bottom bed.
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 94,4) on the panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 94,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the persons are already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 94,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Remove the mattress from the bottom bed and put it on the top bed before
converting the bunk bed into a storage compartment.
Fig. 93 Supports and unlocking device Fig. 94 Bunk bed (side)
9
0 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.12.5 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)
A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to
place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside.
Opening:
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 95,1) hold the slatted
frame open.
Closing:
Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres-
sure springs.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
Fig. 95 Fixed bed
9
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping
7.13.1 Central seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 96,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Depending on the model, insert the bar (Fig. 96,4) or pull it inwards. The
bar is correctly positioned if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm
behind the table leg.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 97,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 97,1) between the seat cushions and the
wall.
Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and
position to the one shown here.
Depending on the model, an enclosed additional cushion must be inserted
between the seat cushions.
Fig. 96 Prior to conversion
Fig. 97 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4Bar
5 Mounting rail
Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 97,1) an
additional cushion must be inserted.
9
2 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.13.2 Central seating group with extension
Extend the table (Fig. 98,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Insert the bar (Fig. 98,7) or pull it inwards. The bar is correctly positioned if
it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the table leg.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 98,8) and open the flap (Fig. 98,5).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 99,6) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 100,2) forwards and to the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 100,1) between the seat cushions and the
wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 100,9) between the back cushions and
the wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 100,10) between the seat cushions and
the wall.
Fig. 98 Prior to conversion
Fig. 99 During conversion
Fig. 100 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2Seat cushion
3Table
4 Mounting rail
5Flap
6 Bench seat extension
7Bar
8 Handle
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 100,1)
and the second additional cushion (Fig. 100,9) two smaller additional cush-
ions must be inserted.
9
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.13.3 Central seating group with divan
Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.13.2).
Remove the armrests (Fig. 101,3) of the divan and lay it aside.
Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 102,4).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 103,2) to the central seating group.
Remove the additional cushion (Fig. 103,1) from the back cushion
(Fig. 102,5). The additional cushion is fixed to the back cushion with Velcro
and can easily be separated.
Lay the back cushion aside.
Insert the additional cushion between the seat cushions and the exterior
wall.
Fig. 101 Prior to conversion
Fig. 102 During conversion
Fig. 103 After conversion
1 Additional cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Armrest
4 Slatted frame
5 Back cushion
For model A 5831 a small additional cushion must be inserted on the divan
behind the front passenger's seat.
9
4 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.13.4 Round seating group (without slatted frame)
Convert the table (Fig. 104,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 105,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 105,1) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 105,4 and 5) and lay them aside.
Fig. 104 Prior to conversion
Fig. 105 During conversion
Fig. 106 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Back cushion
5 Back cushion
9
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.13.5 Round seating group (with slatted frame)
Convert the table (Fig. 107,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull out the slatted frames (Fig. 108,5).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 108,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 108,1) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 108,4) and lay them aside.
Fig. 107 Prior to conversion
Fig. 108 During conversion
Fig. 109 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Slatted frame
9
6 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.13.6 Front bench seat
Turn the driver's seat (Fig. 110,4) and push it all the way forward.
Convert the table (Fig. 110,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
If the vehicle has a guest bed foundation (Fig. 111,6), remove the back
cushion (Fig. 110,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 110,2) and lay them aside.
Depending on the model, lay the included guest bed foundation
(Fig. 111,6) onto the table. Lay the front edge of the guest bed foundation
directly against the driver's seat or the brace on the driver's cabin.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 111,5) on the driver's seat.
Place the seat cushion (Fig. 111,2) on the table.
Insert the back cushion (Fig. 111,1) between the seat cushion and the rear
wall. Observe the wedged form.
If required, push the driver's seat (Fig. 111,4) back to the rear.
Fig. 110 Prior to conversion
Fig. 111 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Driver's seat
5 Additional cushion
6 Guest bed foundation
9
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.13.7 Front bench seat with divan
Extend the table (Fig. 112,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 112,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 113,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 114,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 114,1) of the divan to the side between the
seat cushion and the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 114,5) forwards onto the table.
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 114,4) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 114,8) between the back cushion
(Fig. 114,4) and the seat cushion (Fig. 114,5).
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 114,9) between the back cushion
(Fig. 114,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 114,2).
Fig. 112 Prior to conversion
Fig. 113 During conversion
Fig. 114 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Seat cushion
6Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
9
8 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan (extendable)
Extend the table (Fig. 115,4) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 115,7).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 116,8) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull out the bedding box extension (Fig. 116,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 117,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 117,1) of the divan to the side between the
seat cushion and the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 117,6) forwards onto the table.
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 117,5) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 117,9) between the back cushion
(Fig. 117,5) and the seat cushion (Fig. 117,6).
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 117,10) between the back cushion
(Fig. 117,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 117,2).
Fig. 115 Prior to conversion
Fig. 116 During conversion
Fig. 117 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2Seat cushion
3 Bedding box extension
4Table
5 Back cushion
6Seat cushion
7Flap
8 Bench seat extension
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
9
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Living
7
7.13.9 Front seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 118,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 119,2 and 4) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 119,1 and 5) between the seat cushions and
the exterior wall.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 120,6) between the seat cushions
(Fig. 120,2 and 4).
Fig. 118 Prior to conversion
Fig. 119 During conversion
Fig. 120 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Back cushion
6 Additional cushion
1
00 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Living
7
10
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Gas system
8
8Gas system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
gas consumption
changing the gas bottles
gas isolator taps
external gas connection
automatic switching facility
The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in
chapter 10.
8.1 General
Close all gas isolator taps and the regulator tap before commencing the
journey and when leaving the vehicle.
No source of combustion using gas (gas cooker, gas heater, gas boiler,
etc.) may be in operation when filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. We recommend having the gas pressure regulator checked
no later than every 10 years.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Open a skylight before taking open sources of combustion (gas cooker)
into service.
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If the vehicle or gas devices are not used, close the regulator tap on the
gas bottle.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
1
02 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Gas system
8
8.2 Gas bottles
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the gas bottle compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, no snow
walls or aprons may be allowed to lie against the vehicle. Keep the
intake openings under the floor of the vehicle open and clean.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
C.
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles! Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
10
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Gas system
8
8.3 Gas consumption
Example A full 11 kg gas bottle is sufficient to:
Cook for 3 days using one flame,
Heat for 22 hours on full output or
Cool for 25 days.
With some models, the gas bottle compartment is located right next to the
conversion door. With these models, only open the gas bottle compartment
when the conversion door is closed. Danger from damages.
For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.
Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle
valve.
The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle
down to the operating pressure of the gas devices.
If 2 gas bottles are used at the same time: Connect a gas pressure regu-
lator fitted with an automatic switchover device.
Information available at the dealers or service centre.
For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe, camping supply stores
have corresponding adapter sets.
For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.
The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard
average values.
Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour
Heater Approx. 170 - 490 g/h
Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/h
Refrigerator Approx. 18 g/h
1
04 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Gas system
8
8.4 Changing gas bottles
Depending on the model, the gas bottle holder can be pulled out of the gas
bottle compartment:
Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 121,1), fold it down.
Unlock the slide (Fig. 121,3) using the handle (Fig. 121,2).
Pull out the slide (Fig. 121,3) as far as possible.
Turn back the handle (Fig. 121,2).
Close the regulator tap (Fig. 122,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the
direction of the arrow.
Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 122,2) from the gas bottle at the
hexagon nut (Fig. 122,3).
Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 122,1) from the
gas bottle.
Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.
Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.
Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.
Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 122,2) and the gas tube
(Fig. 122,1) on the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the
hexagonal nut (Fig. 122,3).
Unlock the slide (Fig. 121,3) using the handle (Fig. 121,2).
Push in the slide (Fig. 121,3) as far as possible, and turn back the handle
(Fig. 121,2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 121,1), fold it up.
Close the external flap (see section 7.2).
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at
the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray
the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the
accessories shop.
Fig. 121 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 122 Gas bottle connection
10
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Gas system
8
8.5 Gas isolator taps
A gas isolator tap (Fig. 123) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.
The gas isolator taps can be found on the front of the cooker.
8.6 External gas connection
The external gas connection (Fig. 124) is located at the rear or to the left of the
vehicle depending on the model.
Fig. 123 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator
tap.
Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the
external gas connection.
Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera-
tion pressure of 30 mbar.
Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap,
make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a
leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air.
Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop.
When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is
nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.
Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the
information stickers on the external gas connection.
Fig. 124 External gas connection, gas
isolator tap closed
1
06 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Gas system
8
Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 124,1).
Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 124,2).
8.7 Duomatic switching facility
The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-
bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas
supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary
bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may
still continue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all com-
mercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Construction of the unit The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 125,3) and
a switching regulator (Fig. 125,5). The knob (Fig. 125,6) on the switching reg-
ulator is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle
and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.
Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator
defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter
months.
The manometer (Fig. 125,2) on the central regulator indicates the pressure in
the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The manometer can be
used to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 126).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4) must be opened man-
ually.
The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which
gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit
show which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps
are illuminated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates
which gas bottle is currently being drawn upon.
Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Panel DT 220, the switching facility is
operated via the panel. The operating unit is not provided in these models.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 125 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 126 Operating unit
When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect
the central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regu-
lator in the red area.
10
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Gas system
8
Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:
Winter operation "On and heating"
Summer operation "On"
Putting into operation:
Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4).
Use the knob (Fig. 125,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 125,5) to select
the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the central regulator (Fig. 125,3).
When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 125,5).
Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 126).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 126,2) to winter operation "On and
heating" (Fig. 126,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 126,6). Both gas
pressure regulators are now ventilated. The operating indicator
(Fig. 126,3) lights up.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 126,2) to " " (Fig. 126,5). The operating indi-
cator (Fig. 126,3) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 125,1 and 4).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 126) indicate in the vehicle inte-
rior whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.
Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 126,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator
Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 126,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator
Changing gas bottles If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corre-
sponding gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle con-
tinues supplying the gas appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces
upwards.
1
08 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Gas system
8
10
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
9Electrical system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the
vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
explanations of terms relating to the battery
12 V power supply
living area battery
loading the batteries
transformer/rectifier
panel
240 V power supply
connection to the 240 V power supply
fuse rating
The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in
chapter 10.
9.1 General safety instructions
The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect
the electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the
antennae as a precaution.
9.2 Terms
Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no cur-
rent is consumed and the battery is not being charged.
Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require
continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive
appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has
been switched off.
Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged
by an active appliance and by closed circuit current.
Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD
players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated
during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certifi-
cation, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1"
inspection.
Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured.
Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board
electronics may result.
Total discharge damages the battery.
1
10 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses
a capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours
or a current of 2 A for 40 hours.
External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the
battery.
9.3 12 V power supply
When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V
power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area
with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this
reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be
operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.
During heater operation, the circulation fan is switched on and off by a thermo-
stat control. As a result the living area battery is loaded if no 240 V power
supply is connected.
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery.
The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel.
Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4
or only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then
only operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent
the living area battery from being run down too quickly.
9.3.1 Living area battery
To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, discon-
nect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply. Depending on the
model, either press the switch on the transformer/rectifier or activate the
battery separation on the panel to do so.
The radio in the driver's cabin and the independent vehicle heater are by
default connected to the living area battery via a separate fuse. These
appliances will stay operational if the living area battery is disconnected
from the power supply via the battery cut-off switch of the transformer/rec-
tifier or the battery separation on the panel.
Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully
charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours
before commencing the journey.
During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.
Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the
living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that
is suitable for the battery type (a lead acid or dryfill battery) and the capacity
of the living area battery.
For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living
area battery from the 12 V power supply or recharge it regularly.
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type. A dryfill battery may only be replaced by a dryfill battery.
11
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Position Depending on the model, the living area battery is installed either under the
driver's seat, under the front passenger's seat or in the bench behind the front
passenger's seat.
Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some
electrical appliances continuously require.
The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to
25 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The
self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-dis-
charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.
During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its
capacity.
An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.
The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of
the living area battery is consumed.
When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the
minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual
for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat
when they are charged. Danger of explosion!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Take note of the battery manufacturer's users and maintenance instruc-
tions.
The dryfill battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:
It is not necessary to check the acid level.
It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.
It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.
Even a maintenance-free dryfill battery must be charged regularly.
Total discharge damages the battery.
Recharge battery in good time.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
1
12 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery
The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a
240 V power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter bat-
tery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alter-
nator is not capable of completely charging the starter battery.
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger
When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external
charger, proceed as follows:
Turn off the vehicle engine.
Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.
The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the
skin or the eyes is to be avoided.
In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explo-
sion. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from
naked flames or possible sources of sparks.
Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the
vehicle when charging them using an external charger.
Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
Before charging a dryfill battery, check whether the external charger is
approved for dryfill batteries.
Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.
Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.
11
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.
Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.
Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator
tap on the gas bottle.
There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For
this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery
or the starter battery and then the positive.
Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.
Check that the external charger is turned off.
Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery.
Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the
positive pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "–" to the
negative pole of the battery.
Switch on the external charger.
See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con-
cerning charge period required for the battery.
See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its
strength.
Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
1
14 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/
rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and
secures them.
The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator
and an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring func-
tions.
When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the
starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the
12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger
module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-
heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an
empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are
turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier is located in the seat con-
sole under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
Fig. 127 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
1 Main supply socket 240 V~
2 Output: Block 1 - refrigerator
3 Input: Block 2 - control lines
4 Output: Block 4 - heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area), entrance step
5 Output: Block 3 - panel
6 Output: Block 5 - solar cell (if fitted), spare 2, spare 3, spare 4
7 Output: Block 6 - solar charge regulator (if fitted)
8 Output: Block 7 - auxiliary charging unit
9 Output: Block 8 - consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump, spare 1,
spare 5, spare 6
10 Battery selector switch (lead acid/dryfill option)
11 Fuses
12 Battery cut-off switch (battery On/Off)
11
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even
the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-
charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary
lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery
cut-off switch is turned off.
Switching on/off:
Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON.
Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF.
9.5.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-
former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead
acid" or "dryfill" battery).
9.5.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the
living area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-
tion.
When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens.
The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON
again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The
refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into
service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch
briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and
then reconnected.
If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the
formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-
tery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-
sible.
1
16 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
Measures: Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the
corresponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply
back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery
voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power
supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been
recharged.
9.5.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Transformer/rectifier".
11
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/
rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and
secures them.
The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator
and an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring func-
tions.
When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the
starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the
12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger
module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-
heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an
empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are
turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier (Fig. 128) is installed either
in the seat console of the driver's seat or in the front passenger's seat.
Fig. 128 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
1 Connections BL 2 - auxiliary charging unit 1
2 Connections BL 1 - auxiliary charging unit 2
3Flat fuses
4 Connections BL 9 - solar charge regulator
5 Mains connection 240 V
6 Connections BL 10 - panel
7 Battery selector switch, lead acid/dryfill option
8 Connections BL 13 - panel
9 Connections BL 12 - sensor for living area battery D+
10 Connections BL 11 - panel
11 Connections BL 8 - entrance step, TV, antenna
12 Connections BL 6 - heater, water pump, spare
13 Connections BL 7 - awning, tank heater, awning light
14 Selector switch for the number of auxiliary charging units
15 Connections BL 5 - solar charge regulator
16 Connections BL 4 - refrigerator from starter battery
17 Connections BL 3 - refrigerator
1
18 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.6.1 Battery separation
The battery separation disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even
the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-
charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary
lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery
separation is activated.
Activating/deactivating See section 9.9.1.
9.6.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-
former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead
acid" or "dryfill" battery).
9.6.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the
living area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-
tion.
The safety/drainage valve will open after the activation of the battery sep-
aration. The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery separation is
deactivated again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The
refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After the deactivation of the battery separation the date and time have to
be reset. The remaining settings will be saved at the activation of the bat-
tery separation and will be maintained.
If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the
formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-
tery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-
sible.
11
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Measures: Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the
corresponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply
back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery
voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power
supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been
recharged.
9.6.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is charged with a float charge of 2 A.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.7 Panel IT 20-3
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water
levels
Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-
tery or the living area battery.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 129,4), note the top scale. The gauge automati-
cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,3) " ": The battery
voltage of the starter battery is displayed.
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,3) " ": The battery
voltage of the living area battery is displayed.
The table below will help you correctly interpret the displayed battery voltage
of the living area battery.
Fig. 129 Panel IT 20-3
1 12 V main switch
2 12 V indicator lamp
3 Rocker switch for reading the battery
voltage of the starter and living area
batteries
4 V/tank gauge
5 Rocker switch for reading the level in
the water or waste water tanks
6 240 V indicator lamp
7 ALARM warning light for the living
area battery
1
20 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
Volume of water/waste
water
The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 129,4), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-
ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Over 14.5 V Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive alternator
control
Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive transformer/
rectifier
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long
time can damage the transducers.
12
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Displays:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,5) " ": The volume of
water is displayed.
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,5) " ": The volume of
waste water is displayed.
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 129,7) flashes as soon as the voltage of
the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there
is a risk of a total discharge.
9.7.3 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 129,1) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to
operate.
Switching on:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,1) "12 V": The 12 V
living area power supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2)
lights up green.
Switching off:
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 129,1) " ": The 12 V
living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2)
goes out.
9.7.4 12 V indicator lamp
The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 129,2) illuminates whenever the 12 V main
switch (Fig. 129,1) is switched on.
9.7.5 240 V indicator lamp
The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 129,6) illuminates whenever line voltage
is available at the transformer/rectifier input.
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
1
22 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.8 Panel IT 992
9.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water
levels
Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-
tery or the living area battery.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 130,1), note the top scale. The gauge automati-
cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,9) up " ": The battery voltage of the
starter battery is displayed.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,9) down " ": The battery voltage of the
living area battery is displayed.
The following tables will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage of the
living area battery displayed on the panel IT 992.
Fig. 130 Panel IT 992
1 V/tank gauge
2 Current gauge
3 12 V indicator lamp
4 12 V main switch
5 240 V indicator lamp
6 Rocker switch for special equipment
7 Rocker switch for reading the level in
the water or waste water tanks
8 ALARM warning light for the living
area battery
9 Rocker switch for reading the battery
voltage of the starter and living area
batteries
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
12
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Volume of water/waste
water
The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 130,1), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-
ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,7) up " ": The volume of water is dis-
played.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,7) down " ": The volume of waste water
is displayed.
9.8.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 130,8) flashes as soon as the voltage of
the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there
is a risk of a total discharge.
13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Over 14.5 V Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive alternator
control
Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive transformer/
rectifier
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long
time can damage the transducers.
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
Total discharge damages the battery.
1
24 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.8.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging the living area
battery
The battery current actually flowing is permanently displayed on the current
gauge (Fig. 130,2). The gauge automatically lights up as soon as a switch is
pressed.
Red "discharging" zone: Battery is being discharged at the discharging cur-
rent indicated between 0 and 30 A.
Indicator "0": Battery is neither being charged nor discharged.
Green "charging" zone: Battery is being charged at the charging current
indicated between 0 and 30 A.
9.8.4 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 130,4) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to
operate.
Switching on:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,4) up " ": The 12 V living area power
supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) lights up green.
Switching off:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,4) down " ": The 12 V living area
power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) goes out.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
Display Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Notes for charging/
discharge display
Red "discharg-
ing" zone (dis-
charging current)
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are
switched on or the
alternator is de-
fective
Appliances are on
Battery is being
discharged
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are
switched on
0 A (there is no
current)
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
1)
1)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off
(apart from the refrigerator).
Appliances are
switched off
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
2)
2)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off.
Green zone
(charging current)
Battery is being
charged (up to
30 A possible)
Battery is being
charged (only
possible with solar
power)
Battery is being
charged (up to
max. 16 A possi-
ble; with 32 A
auxiliary charging
unit)
12
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
9.8.5 12 V indicator lamp
The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 130,3) illuminates whenever the 12 V main
switch (Fig. 130,4) is switched on.
9.8.6 240 V indicator lamp
The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 130,5) illuminates whenever line voltage
is available at the transformer/rectifier input.
9.8.7 Switch for water pump
Switching on: Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,6) up: The water pump is turned on.
Switching off:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 130,6) down " ": The water pump is
switched off.
9.9 Panel DT 220
9.9.1 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 131,8) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Depending on the model, the following components remain ready for opera-
tion:
Safety/drainage valve
Heater
Entrance step
Spare 4
Waste water tank heater
Awning light
Awning
Antenna
Refrigerator with automatic power selection
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
Fig. 131 Panel DT 220
1 Key basic menu
2 Key battery menu
3 Key setting menu
4 Key for switching to the next value or
for increasing a selected value
5 Key for switching back to the last
value or for decreasing a selected
value
6 Key for confirming settings or for
changing over
7LCD display
8 Key, 12 V main switch
9 Key tank menu
1
26 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
Switching on: Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The 12 V living area power supply is
switched on. The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) shows the basic menu and is lit
up for 20 seconds. Additionally, in the event of an alarm, the relevant alarm
display appears.
Switching off:
Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) lights up.
Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) again: The 12 V living area power supply
is switched off. To confirm the entry, "12 V OFF" appears in the LCD dis-
play.
Activate battery separation:
Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8): The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) lights up.
Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) again: The 12 V living area power supply
is switched off. To confirm the entry, "12 V OFF" appears in the LCD dis-
play.
Press the battery menu key (Fig. 131,2) and hold it down for approx.
10 seconds: The icon for the living area battery will blink for approx.
5 seconds. The LCD display disappears afterwards. The living area battery
is disconnected from the 12 V power supply.
Deactivate battery
separation:
Press the "12 V" key (Fig. 131,8) and hold it down for approx. 5 seconds:
The LCD display (Fig. 131,7) is illuminated and the symbol for the living
area battery blinks.
Set date and time (see section 9.9.3).
Check battery voltage (see section 9.9.4).
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
12
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
9.9.2 LCD display
9.9.3 Basic menu
The basic menu always appears after switching on the 12 V main switch.
When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.
Calling menu:
Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1): The time and possibly other sym-
bols are displayed.
The symbols contain the following information:
Defroster (Fig. 132,7) switched on or off (optional).
Switching facility for two gas bottles (Fig. 132,8) (optional): The gas
bottle symbol appears when one of the two gas bottles is empty. If the
second bottle is also empty, the symbol flashes and ("ALARM")
(Fig. 132,15) appears in the basic menu.
Mains check (Fig. 132,9): The symbol appears if the vehicle is con-
nected to the 240 V power supply.
Fig. 132 Symbol representation in the LCD display
1 Starter battery/living area battery/internal temperature
2 External temperature
3 Main display
4 Information line
5Unit field
6Arrows
7 Defroster (optional)
8 Reserve bottle in operation (optional)
9 240 V power supply is connected
10 Tank heater (optional)
11 Optical display for buzzer (warning that buzzer is switched off)
12 Display for defects to battery, tank level sensors or temperature sensors
13 Water pump
14 Solar charge (optional)
15 Battery alarm or tank alarm
16 Command to charge the battery
17 Water tank/waste water tank level
The arrow in the LCD display indicates that the selected menu consists of
several menu pages. When the used menu-keys are pressed repeatedly,
the next menu-page appears.
20 seconds after the last key has been pressed the basic menu always
appears unlit.
1
28 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
Heater for waste water tank (Fig. 132,10) (optional): The symbol
appears if the heater for the waste water tank is switched on.
Water pump (Fig. 132,13): The symbol appears if the water pump is
switched on.
Press the basic menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up
the following information in succession:
Internal temperature in °C
External temperature in °C
Date (day, month)
Various settings can be made in the basic menu.
Setting the date and time:
Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1).
Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.
Afterwards, press the settings menu key repeatedly until the hours display
starts flashing.
Use the "+" and "-" keys (Fig. 131,4 and 5) to change the flashing number
and the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) to confirm.
Set the minutes and the date in the same way.
Switching defroster on and
off:
Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1).
Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.
Switch on ("ON") or switch off ("OFF") the defroster with the "+" and "-" keys
(Fig. 131,4 and 5) or switch to automatic mode ("AUTO") and confirm with
the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6).
Displaying the software
version:
Press the basic menu key (Fig. 131,1): The time and possibly other sym-
bols are displayed.
Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds.
Afterwards, press the settings menu key repeatedly until a letter appears
at the start of the LCD display. The software version is displayed.
9.9.4 Battery menu
When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.
Calling menu:
Press the battery menu key (Fig. 131,2): The remaining effective capacity
of the living area battery (Ah or %) is displayed.
Press the battery menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up
the following information in succession:
The temperature menu appears and the "?" flashes if the temperature sen-
sors are defective or if the temperature measured lies outside of the meas-
uring range of -40 °C to +60 °C.
In automatic mode, the defroster is switched on if the external temperature
is less than 7.5 °C and switched off again if the external temperature is
more than 7.5 °C.
If the defroster is switched "ON", this corresponds to the "On and heating"
operating mode. The defroster then heats permanently.
The software version can be displayed, but not adjusted.
12
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
Charging current for the living area battery (A)
Voltage of the living area battery (V)
Voltage of the starter battery (V)
Charging current of a solar installation for the living area battery
Charging current of a solar installation for the starter battery
The tables below will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage display on
the panel.
The functions for a solar installation are only present if the vehicle is
equipped for it.
To change from the Ah display to the % display: Press "OK" key
(Fig. 131,6).
Battery voltage Description
Danger of total
discharge
10.4 V or less The battery monitor immediately cuts
off all power to the appliances (except
for the safety/drainage valve)
11 V or more 12 V power supply can be switched off
with the main switch
10.5 V to 12 V Battery alarm is triggered if the voltage
falls below 12 V
The battery capacity will be set to "zero"
if the voltage remains under 10.5 - 12 V
for more than 1 minute
1)
The system will be turned off if the volt-
age remains under 10.5 - 12 V
1)
for
more than 5 minutes
1)
Depending on the current drain
12 V to 13.2 V Battery in idle condition
More than 13.2 V Battery being charged: Main charge
13.8 V constant Trickle charge voltage
14.3 V Final charge voltage (full charge)
1 h with lead acid battery
8 h with dryfill battery
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 12 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
1
30 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.9.5 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The basic menu appears and the symbols (Fig. 132,1, 15 and 16) flash as
soon as the voltage of the living area battery falls below 12 V (measured under
operation) and there is the threat of a total discharge. Additionally, the voltage
indicator flashes in the battery menu.
Measures:
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
9.9.6 Battery capacity alarm for the living area battery
The basic menu appears and the symbol (Fig. 132,1) flashes. The Ah-data
and the "CHARGE!" command are also displayed in the battery menu.
9.9.7 Battery defect message for living area battery
The basic menu appears and the symbol (Fig. 132,1) flashes. The "DEFECT!"
display is also displayed in the battery menu.
9.9.8 Tank menu
When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.
Calling menu:
Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9): The level of the water tank is dis-
played.
Press the tank menu key repeatedly or the "+" key (Fig. 131,4) to call up
the following information in succession:
Filling level of the waste water tank
Filling level of an addition tank (optional)
Various settings can be made in the tank menu.
Switching the water pump
on and off:
Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).
Press the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) as long as the LCD display is lit.
Switch the water pump on or off by pressing the "OK" key again.
Switching the waste water
tank heater on and off:
Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).
Press the tank menu key again as long as the LCD display is lit.
Press the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6) as long as the LCD display is lit.
Switch the tank heater on or off by pressing the "OK" key again.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
13
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
9.9.9 Tank alarm
The basic menu appears and the symbols (Fig. 132,15 and 17) flash when the
water tank is empty or the waste water tank is full. Additionally, the corre-
sponding percentage indicator flashes in the tank menu.
Fill the water tank or empty the waste water tank in the event of tank alarm
(see chapter 11).
When keys are pressed the LCD display is lit automatically.
Activating or deactivating
the tank alarm:
Press the tank menu key (Fig. 131,9).
Press the settings menu key (Fig. 131,3) for more than 3 seconds. The
tank settings menu is displayed.
Switch on ("ON") or switch off ("OFF") the tank alarm with the "+" and "–"
keys (Fig. 131,4 and 5) and confirm with the "OK" key (Fig. 131,6).
9.10 240 V power supply
The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:
sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A
refrigerator
transformer/rectifier
The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area
are supplied with voltage by the living area battery.
Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as
possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically
charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged
with a float charge of 2 A.
9.10.1 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable
may have a length of maximum 25 m.
The tank alarm can be switched off, for example, if the water tank is con-
stantly empty from using a direct water supply.
When the tank sensors are defective, the tank menu appears and "?"
flashes.
Further information can be obtained from the separate "Control panel"
instruction manual.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault
current protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).
For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sen-
sitive fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.
1
32 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.10.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection
Power cable
Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm
2
) flexible rubber sheathed cable
Maximum 25 m in length
1 plug with earth contact
1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)
Connection possibilities In order to be prepared for all connection possibilities, we recommend the fol-
lowing combination:
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,1) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 133,2)
Cable reel:
Socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 133,4)
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 133,5) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 133,6)
9.11 Fuses
9.11.1 12 V fuses
The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are
fused individually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the
vehicle.
Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.
Fig. 133 Connection possibilities 240 V
connection
Fig. 134 Connecting an angled con-
nector with socket
When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 134,1)
only use a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact
(Fig. 134,2). Do not use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 134,3).
Danger of electrocution!
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
13
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element
(Fig. 135,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 135,2), change the fuse.
Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant
fuses from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat
fuses with the values shown below.
Fuses for the starter
battery
The fuses are located near the starter battery or near the transformer/rectifier.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed near the transformer/rec-
tifier in the console of the driver's seat.
For vehicles built on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the trans-
former/rectifier.
Fig. 135 12 V fuse
1 Unbroken fuse element
2 Broken fuse element
Fig. 136 Fuses for the starter battery
(Fiat)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
2 Flat fuse for optional devices
3 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the right clearance light)
4 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the left right clearance)
5 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
6 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line)
Fig. 137 Fuses in front of the driver's
seat (Ford)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for starter battery)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line of the starter bat-
tery)
3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
1
34 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
For vehicles on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the starter bat-
tery under a covering between the seats.
Not illustrated: Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange (for refrigerators with automatic
power selection system)
Fuses on the living area
battery
The fuses are located near the living area battery or in the driver's cabin in
front of the driver's seat.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed in the console of the front
passenger's seat.
For vehicles on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the living area bat-
tery or next to the driver's seat.
Fig. 138 Fuses for the starter battery
(Renault)
1 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line)
Fig. 139 Fuses on the living area battery
(Fiat)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
2 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
4 Jumbo flat fuse
(value depending on optional device)
Fig. 140 Fuses in front of the driver's
seat (Ford)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for starter battery)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line of the starter bat-
tery)
3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
13
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Electrical system
9
For vehicles built on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the living
area battery.
Thetford toilet fuse
(swivel toilet)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Type of fuse: Flat fuse 3 A/purple
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.
Replace fuse (Fig. 142,1 or Fig. 143,1 ).
Thetford toilet fuse (fixed
seat)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel.
Replace fuse (Fig. 144,1).
Fig. 141 Fuses on the living area battery
(Renault)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
Fig. 142 Fuse for the Thetford toilet Fig. 143 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
(alternative)
Fig. 144 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple
1
36 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Electrical system
9
9.11.2 240 V fuse
The 240 V connection is protected by one or several two-pole automatic circuit
breakers (Fig. 145).
Position The automatic circuit breaker is in the wardrobe or under a cover in the rear
area (under the slatted frame), depending on the model.
Fig. 145 240 V automatic circuit breaker
13
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10Applianc es
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.
The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.
Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man-
uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
heater
air conditioning unit
boiler
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
extractor hood
refrigerator
10.1 General
The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted
depending on the model of the vehicle.
In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the
appliances and their particular features.
To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and
the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.
The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after
30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be
replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an author-
ised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The
operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced.
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor-
respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac-
turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the
manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.
Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the
respective appliance.
Fig. 146 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
1
38 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
10.2 Heater
Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour
will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest
position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will
disappear by themselves after a while.
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
10.2.2 To heat properly
Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 147) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct
the warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable
position so the air can escape as required. To avoid draft close the air outlet
nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air
circulation.
Adjusting the air outlet
nozzles
Fully open: Full hot air stream
Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream
When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes
through each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened,
more warm air flows out of each nozzle.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
When filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage, never run the
heater in gas operation. Danger of explosion!
Do not operate the heater in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of
poisoning and suffocation!
If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation,
exhaust gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger
of suffocation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 147 Air outlet nozzle
13
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles.
The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-
ated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
Winter operation
Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible
to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 148,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V
main switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required
room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the
burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature
sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 148,6)
water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 148,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 148,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 148,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 148,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 148,6).
When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the
heating system.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is
activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area
battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take
into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of
energy.
Fig. 148 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-
tion"
8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
1
40 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Green indicator lamp (Fig. 148,7) is on.
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Switching off:
Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 148,3) to " " (Fig. 148,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to
use up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 149,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 149,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 149,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 149,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 149,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 148)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 149,6).
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only
in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 149 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater"
instruction manual.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
14
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles.
The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-
ated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
Winter operation
Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible
to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 150,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V
main switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required
room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the
burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature
sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 150,6)
water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 150,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 150,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 150,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 150,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 150,6).
When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the
heating system.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is
activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area
battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take
into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of
energy.
Fig. 150 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-
tion"
8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
1
42 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Green indicator lamp (Fig. 150,7) is on.
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 150,3) to " " (Fig. 150,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to
use up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 151,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 151,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 151,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 151,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 151,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 150)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 151,6).
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only
in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 151 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater"
instruction manual.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
14
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater
The hot-water heater has been fitted below in the wardrobe.
Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:
Display (Fig. 152,1)
Control buttons
Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:
Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in
chapter 13.
Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater
is in operation.
Dethleffs recommends to bleed the heating system after the initial heater
operation and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.
For further information, see the separate instruction manual "Alde Com-
pact" and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Fig. 152 Operating unit for hot-water
heater
1 LCD display
2 "Back" button
3 "Activate/Increase" button
4 "Forward" button
5 "Switch off/Decrease" button
6 "System reset" button
7 Lower menu line
8 Information line
9 Status line
10 Upper menu line
When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to
home position after two minutes.
Pos. in
Fig. 152
Button Function
4 Starting operation and selecting a symbol
3 +/On
Activating the selected menu or increasing the dis-
played value
5 -/Off
Deactivating the selected menu or decreasing the dis-
played value
2
Ending operation
6
Store Re-
set
Resetting the system to home position or saving the
set time
1
44 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
LCD display The LCD displays are divided into four sections:
Upper menu line (Fig. 152,10)
Status line (Fig. 152,9)
Information line (Fig. 152,8)
Lower menu line (Fig. 152,7)
Information line Details about temperatures, times and operating states or even error mes-
sages are displayed as text in the Information line (Fig. 153,19).
Fig. 153 LCD displays
Pos. in
Fig. 153
Symbol Signification
Upper menu line
1 On The heater is activated
2 Off
The heater is switched off
3
Selection: Setting the desired temperature
4
Selection: Temporarily increasing (approx. 30 min) the
water temperature in the boiler from 50 °C to 65 °C
5 Selection: Heating with gas
6
Selection: Heating with current
The number in the symbol specifies the selected heat-
ing level
7
Circulating pump is activated
8
240 V power supply is connected
Status line
20 Internal temperature display
9
External temperature display (only when an external
temperature sensor is installed)
10 e.g. Hour
Day, hour and minute display when setting the time
14
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Selecting the operating
mode
The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:
Gas operation
240 V electrical operation
Gas and 240 V electrical operation
The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.
Selecting gas operation:
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the " " symbol (Fig. 153,5) flashes.
Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3). The gas operation is activated.
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves
to home position and the " " symbol lights up.
Selecting 240 V electrical
operation:
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the " " symbol (Fig. 153,6) flashes.
Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3) or the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5) until
the desired output level is visible.
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves
to home position and the " " symbol lights up.
Selecting gas and 240 V
electrical operation:
Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.
Pos. in
Fig. 153
Symbol Signification
Lower menu line
11 Menu
Selection: Calling various functions such as pump op-
eration or button sounds
12 Amp
Not assigned
13 Auto On
Selection: Starting the heater automatically
14
Selection: Setting the night temperature
15 Auto
Selection: Starting the night temperature control auto-
matically
16 Ext
Selection: Starting the heater via remote control (only
when a remote control is installed)
17
Setting the time
18
Activating the lower menu line
Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that
it corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:
Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A
Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A
Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A
If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con-
nected to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only
operates in 240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient
does the gas operation also automatically switch on.
The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle
and the gas isolator tap are opened.
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
1
46 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Switching on the heater: Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4). The "Off" symbol (Fig. 153,2) flashes.
Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3). The "On" symbol (Fig. 153,1) flashes.
The heater starts automatically.
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves
to home position and the "On" symbol lights up.
Switching the heater off:
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4). The "On" symbol (Fig. 153,1) flashes.
Press the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5). The "Off" symbol (Fig. 153,2) flashes.
The heater is turned off.
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,2). The operation ends, the display moves
to home position and the "Off" symbol lights up.
Alde heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during
travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.
The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and
thus has the same function as the vehicle heater.
Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.
The heat exchanger stop cock is located directly on the exchanger.
Turning on:
Set stop cock handle (Fig. 154,1) parallel to the pipe.
Shutting off:
Set drain cock handle (Fig. 154,1) at a right angle to the pipe.
Alde auxiliary circulating
pump
The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.
If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat
exchanger on the stop cock should be shut off.
Fig. 154 Alde heat exchanger
The auxiliary circulating pump works only if a heat exchanger has been
installed and the hot-water heater is running.
14
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 155,1) can be used to heat the vehicle
engine when parked.
The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling cir-
cuit and thus functions as an engine heater.
The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 156,2) is located next to the hot-
water heater operating unit. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 156,1) illuminates
when the pump is operated.
Setting the rotational
speed of the circulating
pump
The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the sliding switch
(Fig. 157,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are
quieter.
The sliding regulator is located in the hot-water heater area.
Setting the output:
Push sliding trap (Fig. 157,1) towards the right. The output is reduced.
Push sliding trap towards the left. The output is increased.
240 V circulating pump Depending on the equipment, the hot-water heater has an additional 240 V cir-
culating pump.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, then it is possible to
switch to the higher output of the 240 V circulating pump.
Fig. 155 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 156 Operating switch for auxiliary
circulating pump
The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. Only operate
the pump for approx. 5 minutes on full output when the system is emptied
or the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating
noises are the result.
Fig. 157 Rotational speed reduction
switch
1
48 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
The switch for switching between the 12 V circulating pump and the 240 V cir-
culating pump is located on the hot-water heater operating unit.
Selecting the circulating
pump:
Press the " " button (Fig. 152,4) until the "Menu" symbol (Fig. 153,11)
flashes.
Press the "+/On" button (Fig. 152,3).
If "OF" is displayed in the information line (Fig. 153,19), keep pressing the
" " button until "PU" is displayed.
Select the "AU" (240 V) or "12" (12 V) setting with the "+/On" button
(Fig. 152,3) or the "-/Off" button (Fig. 152,5).
Exit the menu command with the "Store" button (Fig. 152,6).
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger
The auxiliary heat exchanger is built into the bench seat.
The auxiliary heat exchanger may be used to provide the vehicle's living area
with additional heat during the journey.
The auxiliary heat exchanger is integrated into the heat circulation of the base
vehicle and is therefore only in operation when the vehicle engine is running.
Switching on:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 158,1) of the flow control to the desired position.
The water circulation is open.
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 158,2) for the circulation fan in a clockwise direc-
tion.
Switching off:
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 158,2) to " ".
Turn the control knob (Fig. 158,1) of the flow control to its initial position.
Do not operate the auxiliary heat exchanger at petrol stations. Danger of
explosion!
The fan on the auxiliary heat exchanger can be used for ventilation.
The heat output is continuously adjusted.
Fig. 158 Operating controls for auxiliary
heat exchanger
14
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater
The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater.
The heating of the engine can be switched off.
The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a
timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from
1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of
which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is
60 minutes.
Switching on manually:
Press the button (Fig. 159,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 159,9).
Switching off manually:
Press the button (Fig. 159,7). The symbol (Fig. 159,9) goes off.
Switching on the engine
heating:
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 159,4). Engine is preheated.
Switching off the engine
heating:
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 159,4). Engine stays cold.
Setting the time:
Press the button (Fig. 159,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 159,8).
Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 159,3 and 6).
Programming heating start:
Press the button (Fig. 159,5).
Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 159,3
and 6).
Selecting programmed
switching on time:
Keep pressing button (Fig. 159,5) until the selected programme number
(Fig. 159,1) appears in the display.
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
Fig. 159 Operating unit for independent
vehicle heater
1
50 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and waste water pipes (winter
comfort package)
In order to prevent waste water fittings freezing up, the waste water tank and
the waste water pipes can be electrically heated separately.
When the heater is turned on, temperature sensors monitor the temperature
of the waste water tank and the waste water pipes. If the temperature falls
below 5 °C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water tank
and waste water pipes are heated. If the temperature rises above a certain
level, the heating elements are switched off again.
The control unit (Fig. 160) is installed in the wardrobe. The control lamps on
the control unit have the following meanings:
The indicator lamp (Fig. 160,2) lights up in green: Regulation in operation.
Indicator lamp (Fig. 160,1) lights up in red: Waste water tank is heated.
Indicator lamp (Fig. 160,3) lights up in red: Waste water pipes are heated.
To turn it on and off, use the rocker switch on the panel.
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit
The regulator for the electrical floor warming unit is located in the wardrobe.
Operating levels The electrical floor warming unit has four operating levels:
0 "Off"
20 V "Low heating level"
22 V "Medium heating level"
24 V "High heating level"
Fig. 160 Control unit
On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor
or screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a
power cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.
Do not cover the regulator. Danger of overheating!
The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected
to the 240 V power supply.
The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat
the living area.
15
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply (see section 9.10.1).
Turn the control knob (Fig. 161,2) to the required heating level.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 161,2) to "0" position.
After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat.
If the regulator is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin
(Fig. 161,1) jumps out.
Switching on overload
protection:
Press the pin (Fig. 161,1) on the overload protection when the regulator is
cooled.
10.3 Air conditioning unit
10.3.1 Dometic
Fig. 161 Regulator for electrical floor
warming unit
If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.
In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air
conditioning unit.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 162 Remote control
1 Symbol for automatic mode
2 Symbol for cold mode
3 Symbol for warm mode
4 Symbol for ventilation mode
5 Symbol for discharged batteries
6Time
7 Temperature display
8 Fan speed display
9 ON/OFF button
10 Fan speed button
11 "MODE" button
12 "CLOCK" button
13 Reset key
14 Interior temperature display button
"ROOM"
15 Store button "SET"
16 Light button "LIGHT"(optional)
17 Temperature unit change button "F/
C°"
18 Temperature decrease button "-"
19 Temperature increase button "+"
20 Display
1
52 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-
trol in the direction of the ceiling unit.
Operating modes The air conditioning unit has the following operating modes:
Automatic
Ventilation, manual
Cooling, manual
Heating, manual
Switching on:
Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 162,9).
Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 162,11) as often as required until the
required mode (Fig. 162,1, 2, 3 or 4) is indicated on the display
(Fig. 162,20).
Use the "+" (Fig. 162,19) and "–" (Fig. 162,18) buttons to set the desired
temperature.
Use the fan speed button (Fig. 162,10) to select the desired fan level.
Switching off:
Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 162,9).
LED The LED (Fig. 163,4) on the ceiling unit (Fig. 163,1) displays the operating
status of the air conditioning unit:
Air current The air current can be directed in different directions. The distribution of the air
current toward the front or back is continuously adjustable.
Adjusting air current:
Align the two deflectors (Fig. 163,3 and 5) in the desired position.
Rotate knob (Fig. 163,2) on sliding regulator in an anticlockwise direction.
The sliding regulator for air distribution is released.
Fig. 163 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Status LED Signification
Off Air conditioning unit off
Orange Air conditioning unit ready to operate
Green Air conditioning unit in operation
Red (continuous) No 240 V power connection
Red (flashes once intermit-
tently)
Fault in the interior temperature gauge
Red (flashes twice intermit-
tently)
Fault in the exterior temperature gauge
15
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Slide the sliding regulator forwards or backwards to the desired position.
The side on which the sliding regulator is located is closed.
Turn the knob tight in the clockwise direction.
10.3.2 Truma
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-
trol in the direction of the receiver.
Switching on:
Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is
ready to operate.
Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 165,7). The green indi-
cator lamp (Fig. 164,1) indicates cooling mode.
Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 165,8).
"FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.
"COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be
set separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the
compressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.
Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 165,3
and 4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 165,9) indicates the selected setting
mode.
If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator
lamp goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan con-
tinues to run.
Switching off:
To switch off, press the key (Fig. 165,7) on the remote control again.
The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V
power supply.
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least
3 A. It is otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.
Fig. 164 Receiver Fig. 165 Remote control
An additional key switch (Fig. 164,2) is on the receiver, which can be used
to switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air
conditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating
mode set last on the remote control is automatically selected.
Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counter-
act any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to
10 minutes in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.
1
54 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the cur-
rent time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-program-
ming up to a certain time is not possible.
To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 165,7) on
the remote control.
Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys
(Fig. 165,8, 3 and 4).
Use the key (Fig. 165,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 165,1):
"ON": Switching on
"OFF": Switching off
Use the keys (Fig. 165,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to
15 hours). The arrow (Fig. 165,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.
If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched
off again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator
lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.
The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if
"OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit
with the remote control.
10.4 Boiler
To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter
can be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the
"OFF" programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and
the programming is retained.
The key (Fig. 165,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control
repeatedly to the receiver.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
When filling the fuel tank, on ferries or in the garage, never run the boiler
in gas operation. Danger of explosion!
Do not operate the boiler in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poi-
soning and suffocation!
The water in the boiler can be heated up to 60 °C. Risk of scalding!
Never use boiler when empty.
If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.
Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you
require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the
build-up of limescale.
Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking
water.
15
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-
tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The
boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating
unit (Fig. 166). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical
operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 168).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 166,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat
up until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 166,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to
either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. 25 minutes. The
yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 166,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up
period.
The power supply for the appliance cannot be interrupted by means of the
12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp (Fig. 166,4) on
the operating unit illuminates (see chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 167). The safety/
drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost
and the heater is not switched on.
If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust
gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffo-
cation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 166 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/
drainage valve and empty the boiler.
At temperatures below 2 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Before filling the boiler, switch on the heater and wait until the temperature
on the safety/drainage valve is above 6 °C. Only then can the safety/
drainage valve be closed once again.
The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by
the safety/drainage valve.
The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g.
leaves, ice) at all times.
1
56 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is
already switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to
"Summer operation" (Fig. 166,1).
The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 166,5) is illuminated during the heating up
period. When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up
is finished and the yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Variant: Boiler with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
Fig. 167 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in
240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
15
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 168,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 168,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 168,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 168,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 168,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 166)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 168,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 167,1) perpendicular
to the safety/drainage valve and press the button (Fig. 167,2) in.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 166,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 166) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 167,1) par-
allel to the safety/drainage valve. The snap fastener (Fig. 167,2) jumps out.
The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 10 litres).
Fig. 168 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
1
58 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-
tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The
boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating
unit (Fig. 169). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical
operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 171).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 169,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat
up until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 169,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to
either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. one hour. The
yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 169,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up
period.
The voltage supply for the heater/boiler and the safety/drainage valve cannot
be interrupted by the 12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator
lamp (Fig. 169,4) on the operating unit for Trumatic C heater/boiler illuminates
(see chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 170). The safety/
drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost
and the heater is not switched on.
Fig. 169 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
When the safety/drainage valve is closed a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Therefore, a daily check
of the battery voltage panel is recommended. If the battery voltage drops
to below 10.8 V the function of the safety/drainage valve can no longer be
guaranteed.
When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/
drainage valve and empty the boiler.
At temperatures below 8 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Therefore, you must switch on the living area heater and wait until the living
area temperature exceeds 8 °C before you fill the boiler.
The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by
the safety/drainage valve.
The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g.
leaves, ice) at all times.
15
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is
already switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to
"Summer operation" (Fig. 169,1).
The yellow indicator lamp is illuminated during the heating up period. When
the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and
the yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Variant: Boiler with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
Fig. 170 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in
240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
1
60 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 171,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 171,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 171,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 171,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 171,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 169)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 171,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, pull the pull switch
(Fig. 170,1) up.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 169,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 169) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, push the pull switch
(Fig. 170,1) down. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/
drainage valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 12.5 litres).
10.4.4 Alde boiler
Switching the boiler on/
off
The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not
possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.5.
Fig. 171 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Because of the suction effect, a part of the water supply can be also
drained from the lines and the water tank. The water system is however not
completely emptied.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
16
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 172,1) horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Switch off boiler.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Open drain cocks (Fig. 172). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 172,1) in
a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 12.5 litres).
10.5 Cooker
10.5.1 Gas cooker
Fig. 172 Drain cock
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Alde Compact".
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.
Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han-
dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.
During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects
or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be
near the gas cooker. Fire hazard!
The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov-
ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker.
Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring.
When closing there is danger of getting injured!
1
62 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.
Depending on the model, the operating controls for the gas cooker are found
on the operating panel on the refrigerator or directly on the gas cooker.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".
Open the gas cooker lid.
Turn the control knob (Fig. 173,1) on the burner you wish to use to the igni-
tion position (large flame).
Press the control knob down and hold it.
Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of
lighting.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo)
Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.
Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.
Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.
Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.
Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth-
erwise the glass plate could shatter.
Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker
burners.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas cooker".
Fig. 173 Operating controls for gas
cooker
Fig. 174 Alternative: Operating controls
for gas cooker
Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being
lit.
16
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 175,3).
Lightly press control knob (Fig. 175,2) and set to " " (oven) or " "
(grill).
Press the control knob (Fig. 175,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds.
Gas will stream into the burner.
Press the lighting switch (Fig. 175,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 175,2) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic)
The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.
If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify
your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to
" " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.
Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-
imum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas oven".
Fig. 175 Gas oven (Spinflo)
Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being
lit.
If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
1
64 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
The oven is equipped with electronic ignition.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Gently press the control knob (Fig. 176,1) and turn left to any position.
Press the control knob and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Ignition will
take place automatically.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 176,1) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.4 Microwave oven
If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify
your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to
" " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill.
Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-
imum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas oven".
Fig. 176 Gas oven (Dometic)
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should
never be removed.
Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.
Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.
Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.
If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and
interrupt the power supply.
Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross
in place.
Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.
16
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Switching on: Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.
Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.
Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 177,1).
Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 177,2). Cooking begins.
The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave
oven will switch off automatically.
Switching off:
Open the door and remove foodstuffs.
10.5.5 Extractor hood
The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows
the cooking steam directly outside.
Use the switch (Fig. 178,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.
Use the switch (Fig. 178,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.
The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the
case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave
oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional
240 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in
southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having
230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the
microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Microwave oven".
Fig. 177 Operating controls for micro-
wave oven
Fig. 178 Extractor hood
1
66 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
10.6 Refrigerator
During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At
high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling
power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit
is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to
achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill
Dometic
Removal:
Turn screw (Fig. 179,1 or Fig. 180,1) one quarter turn using a coin.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
Thetford
Removal:
Move the locking device (Fig. 181,1) to the middle.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series, automatic ignition)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill.
Otherwise water can enter during rain.
Fig. 179 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic small)
Fig. 180 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic large)
Fig. 181 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Thetford)
16
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "GAS".
Set the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to maximum power. Gas supply is open.
Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until
ignition has been completed successfully. The "GAS" operating indicator
(Fig. 182,3) lights up yellow.
Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.
Switching off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "230 V". The "230 V" operating
indicator (Fig. 182,2) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Select only one energy source.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 182 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 7 series)
1 Energy selector switch
2 "230 V" operating indicator
3 "GAS" operating indicator
4 "12 V" operating indicator
5 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
1
68 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Switching the 12 V
operation on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 182,1) to "12 V". The "12 V" operating indi-
cator (Fig. 182,4) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 182,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection
and frame heater)
Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES
automatically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator
operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not
required.
The AES selects from the following types of power:
Solar installation 12 V
240 V AC
12 V DC
Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the
first priority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running
and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Fig. 183 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 7 series
with AES and FH)
1 Frame heater (FH) button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Energy selector switch
4 Indicator lamps
5 Indicator lamps
6 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
16
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not run-
ning the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the igni-
tion fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same
time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by
blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) flashes
red.
Change-over between
energy sources
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced
delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy
source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over
from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES.
This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped
briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the con-
trol knob (Fig. 183,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 183,5) show the selected ther-
mostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is
set with the control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its
normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the
thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained
regardless of the type of power being used.
Frame heater (FH)
High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to
form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refriger-
ator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the tem-
perature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the
button (Fig. 183,1). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on,
the indicator lamp (Fig. 183,2) will be lit.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer
than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy
selector switch.
If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. There-
fore, switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle
is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
1
70 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 183,3). The
respective indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) lights up green.
Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 183,6). The
indicator lamps (Fig. 183,5) show the selected thermostat position.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 183,4) flashes
red.
Switching off:
Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 183,3) to " ". No indicator lamp
(Fig. 183,4) is lit.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
10.6.4 Operation (Thetford)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the button (Fig. 184,4) on the refrigerator
panel.
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the refrigerator automatically selects the thermostat position
selected last. This position can be adjusted manually by using the button
(Fig. 184,1). The bars on the display (Fig. 184,3) indicate the selected thermo-
stat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set
with the button. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal oper-
ating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat
setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless
of the type of power being used.
If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur-
rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is
not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
The refrigerator starts when it is switched on with the setting selected last.
The display lights up for about 10 seconds as soon as a button is pressed.
In the event of a malfunction, the display flashes in second clock pulses
and an error code is displayed (see section 15.6.2).
Select only one energy source.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
17
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display (Fig. 184,3) lights up in blue and
the current settings are displayed.
Press the button (Fig. 184,4). The current setting of the operating mode
appears on the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly
until the gas operating mode " " appears on the display. Gas supply is
open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard
until ignition has been completed successfully.
Press the button (Fig. 184,1). The current thermostat setting appears on
the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the
desired setting appears on the display.
Switching off:
Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display (Fig. 184,3) is no longer lit up.
Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Press the button (Fig. 184,2).
Press the button (Fig. 184,4) repeatedly until the 240 V operating mode
" " appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 184,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 184 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Thetford without
SES)
1 Button for thermostat
2 On/Off button
3 Display
4 Button for operating mode
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
1
72 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
Switching 12 V operation
on:
Press the button (Fig. 184,2).
Press the button (Fig. 184,4) repeatedly until the 12 V operating mode " "
appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 184,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Switching 12 V operation
off:
Press the button (Fig. 184,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.5 Refrigerator door locking mechanism
With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The
specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the
freezer compartment.
There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:
Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper-
ation
Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig-
erator is switched off
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked
in the closed position.
Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is
switched off. This prevents mould forming.
17
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Appliances
1
0
Dometic 7 series
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 185,1) to the left " ".
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door.
Push the lock (Fig. 185,1) completely to the right " ".
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 186,1) keeps the
refrigerator door in a fixed position. The refrigerator door will then stay
slightly open (Fig. 186).
Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer
compartment
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 187,1) to the side, so that the open lock " "
(Fig. 187,3) is completely visible.
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock (Fig. 187,1) to the side, so that the closed lock " "
(Fig. 187,2) is completely visible.
Fig. 185 Locking of the refrigerator door
(Dometic 7 series)
Fig. 186 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series)
Fig. 187 Locking of the refrigerator
door/freezer compartment
door (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
Fig. 188 Refrigerator door/freezer com-
partment door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
1
74 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Appliances
1
0
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 188,1) keeps the
refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refriger-
ator door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 188).
Thetford
Opening:
Open the refrigerator door at the handle (Fig. 189,2). The lock (Fig. 189,1)
is released automatically.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door. Ensure that the lock is engaged.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Slightly open refrigerator door.
Open the lock (Fig. 190,2) and snap it into the locking catch (Fig. 190,1).
The refrigerator door will then stay slightly open.
Fig. 189 Lock of refrigerator door,
closed (Thetford)
Fig. 190 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Thetford)
17
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
11Sanitary fittings
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
water tank
waste water tank
complete water system
toilet compartment
toilet
11.1 Water supply, general
The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps
the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically
switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap.
The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water
and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.
Positions of the water
pumps
The submerged pumps are located in the water tank.
The pressurised water pumps (Fig. 191,1) are mounted on the outside of the
water tank.
Fill the water tank with fresh water only.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. For this reason, rinse the water pipes
and the water tank thoroughly with several litres of fresh water before
each use of the vehicle. To do this, open all water taps. After each use
of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain
cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and
deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be
switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.
Two different types of pump are used as water pumps depending on the
model: Submerged pumps or pressurised water pumps.
Fig. 191 Pressurised water pump
1
76 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
11.2 Switch for water pump (winter comfort package)
The switch for the water pump (Fig. 192,1) is installed in the water tank area.
The water pump can be switched off with this switch. This prevents the water
pump from starting if the water system is empty and the water taps are
opened. Otherwise, the water pump will run hot and discharge the living area
battery.
11.3 Water tank
11.3.1 Fresh water filler neck with lid
The fresh water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle, depending
on the model.
The fresh water filler neck is labelled with the word "WASSER" (water)
(Fig. 193,1 or Fig. 194,1). The cap is opened or closed using the key for the
external flap locks.
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 193,2 or Fig. 194,2) and turn a quarter
turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Remove cap.
Fill the water tank with fresh water.
Closing:
Place the cap on the fresh water filler neck.
Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Fig. 192 Switch for water pump
The cap for the fresh water filler neck and for the fuel filler neck are very
similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
Fig. 193 Cap for the fresh water filler
neck
Fig. 194 Cap for the fresh water filler
neck (alternative)
17
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Remove the key.
Check that the cap sits firmly on the fresh water filler neck.
11.3.2 Water drainage
Models with a double floor A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck under the floor of the
vehicle.
The drain cock (Fig. 195,1) is fixed in the double floor. The drain cock is
labelled by the word "Wasser" (water).
Models without double
floor
All models without double floor have no drain cock.
In these models, the water is drained through a stopper in the water tank.
Remove the stopper (Fig. 196,1 or Fig. 197,1) from the drainage opening
(Fig. 196,2) by pulling or unscrewing it.
11.3.3 Filling with water
To fill the water tank with fresh water, proceed as follows:
Open the fresh water filler neck (Fig. 193).
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
Fig. 195 Drain cock in the double floor
Fig. 196 Stopper Fig. 197 Stopper
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
1
78 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
11.3.4 Draining water
Models with double floor To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 198,2) from the water drain neck
(Fig. 198,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 198,1) or place appro-
priate container under the water drain neck.
Open drain cock (Fig. 195,1). The water will drain.
Close the drain cock.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
Models without double
floor
To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unscrew the cap on the water tank.
Remove the stopper from the drainage opening by pulling or unscrewing it.
The water will drain.
Insert or screw in the stopper.
Screw the cap onto the water tank.
11.4 Waste water tank
Fig. 198 Water drain neck and waste
water drain neck
In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste
water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.
For models with an double floor: If the living area heater is out of order, the
waste water tank no longer is sufficiently protected against frost.
Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could
cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.
Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car-
avan sites especially provided for this purpose.
17
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
11.4.1 Waste water tank (models with double floor)
With the models with a double floor, the waste water tank is heated by the hot
air of the living area heater. This protects the waste water tank from frost when
the living area heater is in operation.
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is
located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The waste water tap (Fig. 199,2) is fixed in the double floor. The waste water
tap is labelled with the word "Abwasser" (waste water).
A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 200,3).
Emptying:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 200,4) from the waste water drain neck
(Fig. 200,3) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate
container under the waste water drain neck.
Open the waste water tap (Fig. 199,2). The waste water will run out.
Close the waste water tap.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
11.4.2 Waste water tank (models without double floor)
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is
located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The square bolt for opening the waste water tap is directly accessible under
the vehicle floor.
Fig. 199 Waste water tap Fig. 200 Waste water drain neck
Fig. 201 Operation of the waste water
tap
1
80 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Emptying: Place key (Fig. 201,2) onto the square bolt (Fig. 201,1).
In order to open the waste water tap, turn the square bolt a quarter turn.
Completely empty waste water tank.
To close the waste water tap, turn the square bolt back as far as it will go.
11.4.3 Odour seal
In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle -
depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 202,1).
The odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.
Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and
remove the bottom cover (Fig. 202,2).
11.5 Filling the water system
For models without double floor, remove the siphon base if there is a risk
of frost. This protects the siphon from freezing up.
If the siphon base is removed and the vehicle is used: Place a suitable tank
under the siphon to collect the waste water (not applicable for models with
double floors).
For motorhomes that have had "winter comfort package" special equip-
ment installed in the factory, the waste water pipes are electrically heated.
When the temperature drops below 5 °C, the frost protection equipment
turns on automatically.
Fig. 202 Odour seal
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve
and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.
The Alde system (heater/boiler) has one drain cock (yellow) for emptying.
The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is
filled.
18
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Position the vehicle horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
If necessary, switch on the water pump on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve (Truma). For this pull the pull switch
upwards or turn the knob perpendicular to the safety-/drainage valve and
press the button in.
If the temperature is below 6 °C, the safety/drainage valve cannot be
closed. Therefore switch on the living area heater and wait until the tem-
perature of the safety/drainage valve exceeds 6 °C.
Close drain cocks. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 203,1) horizontally.
If needed, set the stopper into the drainage opening of the water tank or
screw it in.
Close all water taps.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water
pipes with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it.
Close all water taps.
Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.
11.6 Emptying the water system
Fig. 203 Drain cock
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (Truma) and all drain
cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and
deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
If the water pump can be turned off from the panel, always turn off the water
pump from the panel before you empty the water system. Otherwise the
water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.
The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve
and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks (yellow) for emptying.
The Alde system (heater/boiler) has one drain cock (yellow) for emptying.
1
82 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents
frost damage and deposits:
Position the vehicle horizontally.
If necessary, switch off the water pump on the panel.
Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.
Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).
Open drain cocks. To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 204,1) in a vertical
position.
Open the safety/drainage valve (only for Truma boiler). For this press the
pull switch down or turn the knob parallel to the safety/drainage valve.
For models with water drainage in the water tank:
Unscrew the cap of the water tank.
Open the water tank drain (see section 11.3.4).
For models with an double floor: Remove the cap from the waste water
drain neck and open the drain cock.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.
Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty.
Check whether the water tank is completely empty.
Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). To do this,
remove the pipe from the water pump and blow into the pipe.
Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.
Let the water system dry for as long as possible.
After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.
Leave all drain cocks open.
11.7 Toilet compartment
Fig. 204 Drain cock
Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other
items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.
18
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
The flip switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different
places in the toilet compartment depending on the model.
For example, the light switch (Fig. 205,1) of the toilet compartment is located
under the bathroom cabinet.
11.8 Toilet
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford)
The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the
vehicle or from its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.
For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet
clothing, close the washroom door and open the washroom skylight. This
improves the air circulation.
Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is
able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.
After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise
cracks can appear in the shower tray over time.
After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.
Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in
the section 12.2.
Fig. 205 Light switch
If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage
tank (cassette).
Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight
of a person and could break.
Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove
the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri-
mental effect on the sealing rubbers.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping
sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.
1
84 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Filling the water tank: Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 206,1) above the flap for
the Thetford cassette and swivel downwards.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.
The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push
the slide lever (Fig. 207,1 or Fig. 208,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 209,1 or Fig. 210,1).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a
clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 209,2 or Fig. 210,2) goes on whenever the Thetford
cassette has to be emptied.
Fig. 206 Fresh water filler neck for toilet
Fig. 207 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 208 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling
(alternative)
Fig. 209 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet
Fig. 210 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet (alternative)
18
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Emptying the water tank: Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise
direction.
Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.
Close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direc-
tion.
Empty Thetford cassette.
Emptying the Thetford
cassette:
Push the slide lever (Fig. 207,1 or Fig. 208,1) in a clockwise direction. The
sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must
be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4
and 11.8.5.
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat
The flushing of the toilet is fed from the water system of the vehicle.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, turn
the slide lever (Fig. 211,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 211,3).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever
(Fig. 211,1) in a clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 211,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has
to be emptied.
Emptying:
Turn the slide lever (Fig. 211,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is
closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4
and 11.8.5.
11.8.3 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.
Fig. 211 Operating unit Thetford toilet
Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.
1
86 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Putting into operation: Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 213,1) on the panel
(Fig. 212,1) turns on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.
If the green LED (Fig. 213,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal
(Fig. 212,3) briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 212,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.
Flushing:
Close the lid of the toilet.
Press down the pedal (Fig. 212,3) for several seconds.
Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 212,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The red LED (Fig. 213,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.
Removing the cassette:
Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.4 and
11.8.5.
11.8.4 Removing the cassette
Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key
into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 214,1) and turn a
quarter turn.
Remove the key.
Fig. 212 Vacuum toilet Fig. 213 Vacuum toilet panel
Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.
The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.
Fig. 214 Flap for the Thetford cassette Fig. 215 Thetford cassette
18
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Sanitary fittings
1
1
Press both push-button locks (Fig. 214,2) simultaneously with your thumb
and open the flap for the cassette.
Pull the retaining clip (Fig. 215,1) upwards and pull out the cassette
(Fig. 215,2).
11.8.5 Emptying the cassette
Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose.
As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.
If necessary, turn the drainage neck upwards.
Remove the cap of the drainage neck.
Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.
For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The
cassette empties.
Close the drainage neck with the cap.
If necessary, return the drainage neck to its original position.
Push the cassette back to its original position.
Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.
Lock the flap for the cassette.
11.9 Vario toilet
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a Vario toilet. A Vario toilet
can be changed with few maneuvers so that when the shower is in use, the
toilet is available in its own enclosed cubicle. This protects the toilet area from
water spray.
Fig. 216 Emptying the Thetford cas-
sette
Only remove the inner part of the toilet door when it is closed.
Depending on the model, the Vario toilet is installed reverse to the one
shown here. The conversion is then also done reverse to the Vario toilet
shown.
1
88 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Sanitary fittings
1
1
11.9.1 Converting into a shower cubicle
Push the latch (Fig. 217,1) right on the edge of the wash basin and lightly
pull the wash basin. The wash basin moves forwards with the rear wall.
Turn the wash basin and the rear wall (Fig. 218,1) in the direction indicated.
Enter the toilet compartment and close the toilet door (Fig. 218,2) from the
inside and lock.
Put the latch (Fig. 219,1) of the toilet door in a vertical position and open
the inner part of the toilet door.
Turn the inner part of the toilet door in the direction indicated and push
against the rear wall of the wash basin.
The shower compartment is completely set up and can be used.
11.9.2 Conversion to toilet compartment
Turn the inner part of the toilet door and to close, place the latch
(Fig. 219,1) in a horizontal position.
Return the wash basin and the rear wall to the initial position and lock.
Fig. 217 Vario toilet, locking the shower
wall
Fig. 218 Vario toilet
Fig. 219 Vario toilet, toilet door
18
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Care
1
2
12Care
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
exterior of the vehicle
interior
extractor hood
toilets
winter operation
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out
if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.
The checklist address the following topics:
temporary lay-up
winter lay-up
start-up after a lay-up
12.1 External care
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper-
ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.
When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the
cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.
Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle
with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-
pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C.
Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do
not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the
ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may
enter the interior.
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle
Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose.
Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.
Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm
water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth.
Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush.
In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.
Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be
damaged.
Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres-
sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.
Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator
grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the
forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.
1
90 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Care
1
2
Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular
follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow
and the sealing of the surface remains intact.
Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.
Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.
12.1.4 Underbody
The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody
protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately.
Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.
12.1.5 Waste water tank
Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.
Cleaning:
Empty the waste water tank.
Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.
If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by
hand.
12.1.6 Entrance step
If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubri-
cant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the
entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance
step.
Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the
surface!
Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish
washing liquid and a soft cloth.
Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con-
taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks
may result from their use.
Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-
removing agents) with acrylic glass.
Do not clean vehicle in car wash.
Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.
Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.
Treat rubber seals with glycerin.
An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up
treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish.
These agents are available at the accessories shop.
Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers
and service centres will be happy to advise you.
19
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Care
1
2
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)
Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water.
Remove heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, imme-
diately rinse the cleaned area with lukewarm water.
12.2 Interior care
Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and
living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser
may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted
surfaces.
Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on
upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery.
Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not loose its colour.
Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion
with a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather.
Treat stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use
a mixture of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off
with soap water. Do not use any products that contain solvents or abra-
sives.
Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild
household detergent.
Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth.
Work from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.
When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull
knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off
any residue with a moist cloth.
Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.
Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.
If possible, treat stains immediately.
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see
section 12.1.3).
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be
treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or
scourers containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness
and formation of cracks.
Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling
water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water
cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps.
Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or
for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause
damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying
products for decalcification.
Save water. Mop up all remaining water.
Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.
For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa-
tives and service centres will be glad to advise.
1
92 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Care
1
2
Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do
not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor
covering may stick together.
Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which
may cause scratching or grooves.
Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from pene-
trating the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.
Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or
vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.
Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the
vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap
at 30 °C (curd soap).
Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach-
ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with
a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).
Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt
must be completely dry before being rolled up.
Clean water tank with water and dish washing liquid and rinse subse-
quently with plenty of fresh water.
12.3 Extractor hood
Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary
depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter
until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.
Cleaning the filter:
Pull down the filter (Fig. 220,2) with the handle (Fig. 220,1).
Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.
Let the filter dry completely and re-install.
12.4 Toilets
If the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter
lay up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Fig. 220 Extractor hood
19
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Care
1
2
12.4.1 Toilet with separate water tank
Emptying the tank: Press the flush button, to active the operating panel.
Open the sliding trap and flush until no more water flows.
Close the sliding trap.
Empty the cassette (Fig. 221,2) at a disposal station authorized for this pur-
pose and clean it.
Leave the drainage neck (Fig. 221,3) open.
Remove the drain hose (Fig. 221,5) from the holder (Fig. 221,4).
Place a sufficiently large container under the drain hose.
Remove the drain plug (Fig. 221,1) and let the residual water run out.
When no more water flows out, place the drain plug in the drain hose.
Replace the drain hose in the holder.
12.4.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Emptying valve: Empty the entire water system.
Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.
Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and
clean it.
Turn off power supply.
Remove cover (Fig. 222,3).
Unscrew the cap (Fig. 222,2).
Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 222,1).
Fig. 221 Toilet water tank drain hose
A backflow preventer is installed above the valve. The backflow preventer
hinders water from running out of the valve. Press the pedal until no more
water runs out.
Fig. 222 Vacuum toilet valve
1
94 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Care
1
2
Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.
Screw the cap back on and attach cover.
12.5 Winter care
De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We
recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime.
Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular
strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.
12.5.1 Preparations
Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces-
sary.
Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation
system and the heater.
Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.
Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.
12.5.2 Winter operation
During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied
under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and
avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.
When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and
roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures
optimal ventilation.
In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp
areas.
12.5.3 At the end of the winter season
Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this
is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are
removed.
Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.
If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 °C. In the
case of extreme external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors
should be left slightly open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the
freezing of water pipes, for example, and counteract the formation of con-
densation in the storage spaces.
If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with
winter insulation mats.
If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.
19
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Care
1
2
12.6 Lay-up
12.6.1 Temporary lay-up
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. This is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked
vehicle.
The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from
view.
To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, reg-
ularly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially impor-
tant approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.
If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If
damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle
could catch fire.
Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.
Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the
fuel tank system
Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move ve-
hicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occur-
ring on tyres and wheel bearings
Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma-
tion of cracks!
Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure
Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area
Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film
may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.
In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base ve-
hicle
Body
All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other
openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This
prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry
Interior
Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover
Clean refrigerator
Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly
open
Search for traces of animals that have gained entry
Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove
it from the vehicle
1
96 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Care
1
2
12.6.2 Winter lay-up
Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:
Gas system
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle
Close all gas isolator taps
Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if
they are empty
Electrical system
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply
Water system
Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the
water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve and all drain cocks open. Ob-
serve the notes in chapter 11
Switch off the safety/drainage valve on the transformer/rectifier. Oth-
erwise the battery will become discharged too quickly
If the safety/drainage valve is switched off, the water
system is no longer sufficiently protected against frost.
Activities Done
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or
protect with varnish
Fill fuel tank with winter diesel
Check antifreeze in the cooling water
Rectify damage to the paintwork
Body
Keep the forced ventilation open
Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs
Clean and grease all door and flap hinges
Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms
Rub all rubber seals with talc
Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders
Interior
Position de-humidifiers
Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place
Air the interior every 3 weeks
Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and
drawers
Thoroughly clean the interior
If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle
19
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Care
1
2
12.6.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-
up over winter
Go through the following checklist before start-up:
Electrical system
Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protect-
ed from frost (see chapter 9)
Water system
Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised
store
Complete vehicle
Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings
are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins
Activities Done
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Check the tyre pressure on all tyres
Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel
Body
Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step
Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs
Check that the windows and skylights are working properly
Check that all the external locks are working, such as the external
flaps, the filler neck and the conversion door
Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is
one)
Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)
Gas system
Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con-
nect to the gas pressure regulator
Electrical system
Connect to 240 V power supply using the external socket
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.
Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply (see
chapter 9)
Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock-
et and all installed electrical appliances
Water system
Use several litres of fresh water to rinse out water pipes and water
tank. To this end, open all water taps
Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water
tank
Close safety/drainage valve, drain cocks and water taps
Check the safety/drainage valve, water taps, drain cocks and water
distributors for leaks
1
98 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Care
1
2
Appliances
Check the function of the refrigerator
Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years
Check the function of the heater/boiler
Check the function of the gas cooker
Check the function of the air conditioning unit
Activities Done
19
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
13Maintenan ce
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work
concerning the vehicle.
The maintenance instructions address the following topics:
Alde hot-water heater
independent vehicle heater
air conditioning unit
replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
AL-KO rear axle
At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain
spare parts.
13.1 Inspection work
Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter-
vals.
This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of
this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel possessing this
technical knowledge are available for assistance at all Dethleffs service cen-
tres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well
as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the
vehicle.
The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.
Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer
service booklet.
13.2 Maintenance work
As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre-
quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation
and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the
vehicle more often.
Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified
in the corresponding instruction manuals.
13.3 Alde hot-water heater
Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car-
ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre-
served.
The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in
the event of damage and guarantee claims.
Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.
During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling
level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the
heating fluid.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-
tion and to check the glycol content.
2
00 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 223,3) and "MAX"
(Fig. 223,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 223).
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid
Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Unscrew or pull off the panel.
Open the rotary lid (Fig. 223,1) on the compensator reservoir.
Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.
Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con-
tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.
Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.
Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at
intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after
some time.
Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix-
ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water
heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe
the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Alde Compact" heater.
Fig. 223 Compensator reservoir hot-
water heater
The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res-
ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.
20
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system
The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Open bleeding valve (Fig. 224,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.
Close bleeding valve.
Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.
Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.
13.4 Independent vehicle heater
Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with
a cold engine and smallest fan settings.
Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater
checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
13.5 Air conditioning unit
Fig. 224 Bleeding valve of hot-water
heater
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint
filter, the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning
unit is consequently impaired.
Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up.
Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.
2
02 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.5.1 Truma
A lint filter (Fig. 225,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the
air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least
twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.
The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose
free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.5.2 Dometic
A lint filter and an activated carbon filter are each located in the lower part of
the air conditioning system ceiling unit (Fig. 226,2) behind the ventilation grills
(Fig. 226,1 and 3). The lint filters must be cleaned at regular intervals and
replaced if necessary. The manufacturer recommends replacing the activated
carbon filter yearly.
On the left side of the ceiling unit (outside of the vehicle) is located the
drainage opening for the condensation. Keep the drain openings free from dirt,
leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
Fig. 225 Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Fig. 226 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to
cool down before changing bulbs.
Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box
before changing bulbs.
Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.
20
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
13.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws)
Changing bulbs: Undo the screws (Fig. 227,1) and carefully remove the glass cover
(Fig. 227,2).
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Fasten the glass cover again.
13.6.2 Ceiling lamp
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out the cover
(Fig. 228,2) at the notch (Fig. 228,1) and remove it.
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in
its glass. The bulb might burst.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when
installing the new bulb.
Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.
Fig. 227 Ceiling lamp
Fig. 228 Ceiling lamp
2
04 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.6.3 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade)
Changing bulbs: Pull the halogen bulb (Fig. 229,1) forward out of the socket.
Press the new halogen bulb into the fitting between the two spring tongues.
13.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Changing bulbs: Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 230,1).
Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 230,2) from the holder.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.5 Room lamp
Changing bulbs: Unscrew the cap (Fig. 231,1).
Remove cover (Fig. 231,2).
Fig. 229 Halogen spotlight (with glass
shade)
Fig. 230 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Fig. 231 Room lamp
20
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
Press the light covering (Fig. 231,3) lightly together and remove it.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.6 Living area lamp
Changing bulbs: Remove the screw (Fig. 232,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 232,2).
Press the glass together gently and remove from the housing.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.7 Recessed halogen light with housing
The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 233,1).
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 233,3) from the
housing.
Remove the cover ring with the glass.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 233,2).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 232 Living area lamp
Fig. 233 Recessed halogen light
2
06 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat)
The recessed halogen light (Fig. 234,1) is installed flush with the panel.
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 235,1) from the
housing.
Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 235,2) from
the lower section of the recessed halogen light.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 235,3).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's cabin (model I)
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out and remove
the glass cover (Fig. 236,1).
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 234 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 235 Changing the halogen bulb
Fig. 236 Surface-mounted halogen light
driver's cabin (model I)
20
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
13.6.10 Wardrobe light
Changing bulbs: Press the light covering (Fig. 237,1) lightly together and remove it.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.7 Changing the battery of the wardrobe light with LED
The wardrobe light has a button cell that supplies voltage to the LED.
Changing the battery:
Carefully push back the retaining clip (Fig. 238,3) on the top side of the
wardrobe light (Fig. 238,5). This exposes the nose (Fig. 238,4) on the
retaining clip.
Pull the battery holder (Fig. 238,2) out at the top.
Take the button cell (Fig. 238,1) out of the battery holder.
Insert new button cell of the same type (+/-), observing the correct polarity.
Insert the battery holder with the retaining clip to the rear of the housing and
push it downwards until the nose snaps into place.
Fig. 237 Wardrobe light
Use only button cells of the same type.
Fig. 238 Wardrobe light with opened
battery compartment
2
08 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.8 AL-KO rear axle
Fiat vehicles with AL-KO
rear axle without
pneumatic spring
In addition to the regulations and notes in the operator manual of the basic
vehicle as well as in the maintenance manual, the rear axles must be relubri-
cated after 20,000 km, or at least every 12 months.
The lubricator nipples (Fig. 239, arrow) are situated on the underside of the
axle tube.
13.9 Spare parts
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with
manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare
part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author-
ised specialist workshop. Our Dethleffs dealers and service centres are avail-
able for any spare parts requirement.
The rear axles must not bear any load while they are being lubricated.
Use one of the following types of grease for lubrication:
Costrac GL 1501 by the firm Klüber
Cardex 3746 SP by the firm CONDA
If the vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free torsion bar spring axle
or a rear axle with pneumatic cushioning, the two lubricator nipples are left
out.
Fig. 239 AL-KO rear axle
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by
Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle.
These products are available at your Dethleffs dealer. The Dethleffs
dealer is informed about admissible technical details and carries out the
required work correctly.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
20
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Maintenance
1
3
Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:
Fuses
V-belt
Windscreen blades
Bulbs
Water pump (submerged pump)
When ordering spare parts please indicate the serial number and the vehicle
type to the Dethleffs dealer.
The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory
standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use.
When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in
the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. Your
Dethleffs dealer will be pleased to advise you.
13.10 Vehicle identification plate
The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 240) with the serial number is mounted in
the entrance area.
Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:
Identifies the vehicle
Helps with the procurement of spare parts
Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner
Fig. 240 Vehicle identification plate
1Type
2 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle with trailer
3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on
unit)
4 Manufacturer's code and chassis
number
5 EG type approval number
6 Permissible rear axle load (for
tandem axle)
7 Permissible axle load rear
8 Permissible axle load front
9 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle
10 Serial number
Fig. 241 Cover for chassis number (Fiat
base vehicle)
Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer
service office.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the chassis number is located behind a
cover (Fig. 241,1) in the entrance on the front passenger's side.
2
10 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Maintenance
1
3
13.11 Warning and information stickers
There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning
and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.
Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a
service centre.
21
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Wheels and tyres
1
4
14Wheels and tyres
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
tyre selection
handling of tyres
changing wheels
spare wheel support
tyre pressure
At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre
pressure for your vehicle.
14.1 General
Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth
and external damage.
Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by
law is reached.
Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer
and winter tyres).
Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The approved wheel
rim and tyre sizes are listed in the vehicle documents; your Dethleffs dealer
or the dealer for the base vehicle will be pleased to advise you.
Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only
then do they reach full strength.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in
these tyres.
Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.
Fiat- and Ford-based vehicles are equipped with only one tyre repair kit as
standard.
In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle
safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.
Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle
over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date
of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits
the year of manufacture.
Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2007.
2
12 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Wheels and tyres
1
4
Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re-
tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise
(Fig. 242) after 50 km (30 miles).
When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to
3,000 miles).
For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings
free from pressure points:
Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the
vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is
changed.
14.2 Tyre selection
The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or
can be got from the Dethleffs dealers. Each tyre must fit the vehicle on which
it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter, width),
which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition, the
tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and
speed.
Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed
on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its
load index (= LI, load index code).
The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also
important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with
full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together,
load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official
component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which
appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the
specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.
Fig. 242 Tighten the wheel nuts or
wheel bolts cross-wise
A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause
it to burst.
If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type
approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can
lapse. Your Dethleffs dealer will be pleased to advise you.
21
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Wheels and tyres
1
4
14.3 Tyre specifications
14.4 Handling of tyres
Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and
result in it getting ruptured.
Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage
the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.
Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers
significantly increases wear.
If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked.
Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to
a significant increase in wear.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer
serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.
14.5 Changing wheels
Description Explanation
215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q
215 Tyre width in mm
70 Height-to-width proportion in percent
R Tyre design (R = radial)
15 Rim diameter in inches
C Commercial (transporter)
109 Load index code for single tyres
107 Load index code for twin tyres
Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)
The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.
Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to
"P" position.
Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel
with the wheel chocks.
Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.
If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.
Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum-
stances on the bodywork.
Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec-
ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate.
Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the
tyre.
2
14 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Wheels and tyres
1
4
14.6 Spare wheel support
The spare wheel is found on the underside of the vehicle in a basket which can
be opened from the outside.
14.6.1 Spare wheel support under the vehicle (Renault)
Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.
Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down
under it.
Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.
Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 242).
When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres),
use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm
seating of the wheels and the function of the braking system depend on
this.
Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize
road safety.
Do not replace wheels cross-wise.
Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard
warning triangle.
Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre
load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre
sizes stated in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base
vehicle.
For models with a Fiat or Ford base vehicle, there is no spare wheel. For
these vehicles, a tyre repair kit is included for inflating the flat tyre with
foam.
Due to its weight and fitted position, the spare wheel can be raised or
lowered by a very strong person only. Always get a second person to
assist.
21
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Wheels and tyres
1
4
Removing the spare wheel: Use the ratchet wrench and extension to loosen the nuts (Fig. 243,1) on the
rear hooks (Fig. 243,2) to the left and right of the spare wheel support.
Unscrew the wheel nuts approx. 3 to 4 cm.
Press the clip (Fig. 243,3) slightly upwards, press the hooks backward or
forward and unhook the clip.
Take down the basket and remove the spare wheel.
14.7 Tyre pressure
The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres-
sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.
As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate
of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst,
check the tyre pressure regularly.
Fig. 243 Spare wheel support under the
vehicle
Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious
tyre damage.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi-
cles.
Pressure in hot tyres must be 0.3 bar higher than in cold tyres. Recheck the
pressure when the tyres are cold.
Tyre pressures in bar.
The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. Dethleffs recom-
mends the use of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.
The tyre pressure tolerance is +/- 0.05 bar.
For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to
specific documentation.
When a replacement is needed, Dethleffs recommends "Michelin-
Camping" tyres.
2
16 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Wheels and tyres
1
4
The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is
possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case,
the Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.
Types Tyre size Front air
pressure in
bar
Rear air
pressure in
bar
Fiat
All types 215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
4.1 4.5
All types with "Michelin
Camping" tyres
215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
5.0 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
4.5 5.0
All types with "Michelin
Camping" tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
5.5 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
4.5 3.5
All types with "Michelin
Camping" tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
5.5 3.5
Renault
All types 225/65 R 16 C
(112/110) Q
3.8 4.4
All types with "Michelin
Camping" tyres
225/65 R 16 C
(112/110) Q
4.5 5.5
Ford
All types 215/75 R 16 C
(113/111) Q
3.7 4.9
185/75 R 16 C
104/102 R
(twin tyres)
4.7 3.3
21
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
15Troubleshooting
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.
The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.
The instructions address the following topics:
braking system
electrical system
gas system
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
heater
boiler
refrigerator
air conditioning unit
water supply
toilet
body
The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great
deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this
instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work-
shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.
15.1 Braking system
15.2 Electrical system
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type. A dryfill battery may only be replaced by a dryfill battery.
See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.
Fault Cause Remedy
Road light system does
no longer work correctly
Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel-
evant light, replace bulb.
Note volts and watts
specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Interior lighting does not
work
Bulb is defective Remove cover, replace
bulb. Note volts and
watts specifications
The electrically operated
entrance step cannot be
moved in or out
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
2
18 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
No 240 V power supply
despite connection
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged when
operated in 240 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the starter or living area
battery is defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the starter or
living area battery
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Living area battery is not
charged during vehicle
operation
Fuse on terminal D+ of
the alternator is defective
Replace fuse
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V indicator lamp does
not light up
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Battery cut-off switch on
the transformer/rectifier is
switched off
Set battery cut-off switch
to on
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Flat fuse (2 A) on the liv-
ing area battery is defec-
tive
Replace flat fuse (2 A) on
the living area battery
No LCD display 12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V power supply does
not work
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charge the living area
battery
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the living area
battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
21
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
12 V power supply does
not work in 240 V opera-
tion
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Contact customer service
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the living area
battery
Starter battery is dis-
charged in 12 V opera-
tion
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
No voltage is supplied by
the living area battery
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charge living area bat-
tery immediately
Total discharge
damages the
battery.
If the vehicle is to be laid
up for a long period, fully
charge the living area
battery beforehand
Extractor hood does not
work
240 V automatic circuit
breaker is switched off
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
12 V supply device
switched off
Switch on 12 V supply
device on the panel
Power pack is defective Contact customer service
Fuse (15 A) on the 240 V
fuse box is defective
Replace fuse (15 A)
Fuse (15 A) on the trans-
former/rectifier is defec-
tive
Replace fuse (15 A)
Extractor hood defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit can-
not be switched on or off
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Remote control battery is
empty
Change remote control
battery
Fault Cause Remedy
2
20 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.3 Gas system
15.4 Cooker
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven
15.4.2 Microwave oven
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Fault Cause Remedy
No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle
Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap
Regulator tap on the gas
bottle is closed
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle
External temperature is
too low (-42 °C for pro-
pane gas, 0 °C for bu-
tane gas)
Wait for higher external
temperatures
Built-in appliance is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Ignition fuse does not op-
erate (flame does not
burn after the control
knobs are released)
Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob
pressed for approx. 15 to
20 seconds after ignition
Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service
Flame extinguishes when
being reduced to its mini-
mum setting
Thermocouple sensor is
incorrectly set
Correctly reset thermo-
couple sensor (do not
bend). The sensor tip
should protrude by 5 mm
beyond the burner. The
sensor neck should not
be more than 3 mm away
from the burner ring; if
necessary, contact cus-
tomer service
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
22
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.5 Heater/boiler
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance.
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma
Fault Cause Remedy
Microwave oven does not
cut in
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Door of the microwave
oven is not properly
closed
Remove foreign bodies
stuck in the door of the
microwave oven and
close door properly
Fault Cause Remedy
Heating does not ignite Temperature sensor on
operating unit or remote
sensor defective
Pull out plug on operating
unit. The heating then
works without thermostat.
Contact the customer
service as soon as possi-
ble
Red indicator lamp
"Fault" illuminates
Air in the gas pipe sys-
tem
Switch off and on again.
After two futile ignition at-
tempts, wait for
10 minutes before trying
again
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Defect of a safety ele-
ment
Contact customer service
Red indicator lamp
"Fault" is flashing
Operating voltage too low Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Green indicator lamp be-
hind knob is not lit
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Fuse in the electronic
control unit has been trig-
gered
Contact customer service
Living area battery defec-
tive
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Yellow indicator lamp on
the energy selector
switch does not illumi-
nate
No supply voltage Check 240 V connection
and fuses
Overheating switch was
triggered
Press overheating switch
2
22 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler
15.6 Refrigerator
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance.
Boiler empties, safety/
drainage valve has
opened
Internal temperature be-
low 8 °C
Heat inside
Safety/drainage valve
separated from battery
supply
Cancel battery separa-
tion
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Safety/drainage valve
does not close when
switching on
Safety/drainage valve
separated from battery
supply
Cancel battery separa-
tion
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge living area bat-
tery (or have it charged)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Red and green indicator
lamps are not lit
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Fan wheel runs noisily or
not steadily
Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service
department
Fault Cause Remedy
Heating does not ignite
with gas operation
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Heating does not ignite at
240 V electrical operation
No 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Connect 240 V power
supply
Heating running, but no
heat at the convectors
Circulating pump does
not work
Switch on room thermo-
stat
Contact customer service
Heating and circulating
pump running, but no
heat at the convectors
Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater
Fault Cause Remedy
22
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES (error diagnostics)
Fault Cause Remedy
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 240 V mode
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 12 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) in
the starter battery is de-
fective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) in the starter bat-
tery
Flat fuse (2 A) in the
starter battery is defec-
tive
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the starter battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 12 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in gas mode
The "GAS" operating in-
dicator flashes yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Air in the gas pipe Repeat ignition 3 or
4times
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
Error code Cause Remedy
1 The 240 V power supply is
75 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Contact customer service
2 The 12 V power supply is
75 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Contact customer service
3 The refrigerator is operated
at 240 V, even though no
240 V mode has been se-
lected
Contact customer service
4 The refrigerator is operated
at 12 V, even though no 12 V
mode has been selected
Contact customer service
2
24 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series with AES
5 The refrigerator is operated
in gas operation mode even
though gas operation mode
has not been selected
Contact customer service
6 The gas valve has been
identified as open even
though it should be closed
Contact customer service
7 The gas valve has been
identified as closed even
though it should be open
Contact customer service
8 The 240 V power supply is
20 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Check 240 V power supply
9 The gas supply has been cut
off. The flame has not been
ignited within 30 seconds in
gas operation mode
Check the gas supply
Repeat ignition 3 to
4times
Contact customer service
10 The refrigerator is set to 12 V
mode and the vehicle engine
is not running
Start the vehicle engine or
select a different energy
source
11 The refrigerator is set to "AU-
TO" mode and no energy
source is available
Provide an energy source
and reset the refrigerator.
Switch the refrigerator off
and on again for this purpose
12 Contact customer service
13 The temperature sensor is
defective
Check whether the plug is in-
serted properly above the fin
inside the refrigerator. If so:
Contact customer service
14 The connection between op-
erating controls and control
device is interrupted
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Indicator lamps "230 V",
"12 V" or "AUTO" are not
lit green
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
No electrical operating
voltage
Connect 240 V power
supply
Let the vehicle engine
run
Switch on or replace the
fuse
Contact a specialist
workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch to 12 V mode dur-
ing the journey
Operating voltage of al-
ternator is not present/
too low
Contact a specialist
workshop
Error code Cause Remedy
22
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.7 Air conditioning unit
15.7.1 Dometic
Refrigerator does not
switch on in gas opera-
tion, "GAS" indicator
lamp is not lit yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
"GAS" indicator lamp
flashes yellow, no gas
Air in the gas pipe Switch off the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle and the
gas isolator tap of the re-
frigerator
Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch. After 10 seconds,
the AES will attempt an-
other ignition
If the "GAS" indicator
lamp flashes yellow
again after approx.
30 seconds, the failure
has not been remedied
yet
Repeat this process two
to three times for ventila-
tion. If the refrigerator
cannot be operated, con-
tact customer services
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
No 240 V power supply Connect the vehicle to
the local power supply
Temperature below
16 °C
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Thermostat defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit does
not warm up
No 240 V power supply Connect the vehicle to
the local power supply
Temperature above
30 °C
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Thermostat defective Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
2
26 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.7.2 Truma
15.8 Water supply
Water is entering the ve-
hicle
Drainage holes for con-
densation are clogged
Clean air conditioning
unit
Seal is defective Contact customer service
No more air circulation Air filter clogged Clean air filter
Fan wheel defective Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if
necessary
Temperature below
16 °C
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Air filter contaminated Replace air filter
Fault Cause Remedy
Leakage water inside the
vehicle
A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect
water pipes
No water Water tank is empty Top up with fresh water
Drain cock not closed Close drain cock
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Fuse of the water pump
is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Water pump defective Exchange water pump
(have it exchanged)
Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or
replace
Transformer/rectifier de-
fective
Contact customer service
Water pump switched off
on panel
Switch water pump on
Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Top up with fresh water
Fuse for cassette is de-
fective
Replace fuse
Display for water and
waste water indicates a
wrong value
Measuring probe in the
waste water or water tank
is soiled
Clean water/waste water
tank
Measuring probe is de-
fective
Replace measuring
probe
Fault Cause Remedy
22
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Waste water tank cannot
be emptied
Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap
on the waste water tank
and drain the waste wa-
ter. Rinse the waste wa-
ter tank well
Drain on the one-hand le-
ver mixer is clogged
Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-
calcify in vinegar water
(only for products made
from metal)
Water jets on the shower
nozzle clogged
Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle
in vinegar water (only for
products made from met-
al) or rub off soft nozzle
burling
Water drains from the
shower tray slowly or
does not drain at all
The vehicle is not in a
horizontal position
Position the vehicle hori-
zontally
Fault Cause Remedy
Water doesn't remain in
toilet bowl
Seal dirty or defective Clean seal or have re-
placed
Water does not flow
properly into the toilet
bowl
Water pressure too low Contact customer service
Water is entering the ve-
hicle
Hose connection loos-
ened
Check connections for
proper seat and tighten
hose clamps
Vacuum pump does not
run
No power present Control power supply (or
have checked)
Vacuum pump runs too
often
Cap or connection not
sealed tightly
Check connections be-
tween toilet and vacuum
(or have checked)
Toilet clogged Improper used Remove blockage
Fault Cause Remedy
2
28 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Troubleshooting
1
5
15.10 Body
Fault Cause Remedy
Flap hinges/door hinges
are difficult to operate
Flap/door hinges are not
sufficiently lubricated
Lubricate flap hinges/
door hinges with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Hinges/joints in the bath-
room unit/toilet compart-
ment are difficult to
operate/make a grating
noise
Hinges/joints are not suf-
ficiently lubricated
Lubricate hinges/joints
with solvent-free and
acid-free grease
Spray cans
often contain
solvents
Storage compartment
hinges are difficult to op-
erate/make a grating
noise
Storage compartment
hinges are not sufficiently
lubricated
Lubricate storage com-
partment hinges with
acid-free and resin-free
grease
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is difficult to operate
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is not (sufficiently) lu-
bricated
Lubricate front bonnet
swivel system with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Heki skylight difficult to
operate
Threaded spindle not lu-
bricated
Lubricate threaded spin-
dle
Threaded spindle defec-
tive
Have threaded spindle
replaced
Our Dethleffs dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts
requirement.
22
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Special equipment
1
6
16Special equipment
16.1 Weight details for special equipment
Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If
these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the
standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating
the payload.
All weight details are approximate.
Observe the max. permissible gross weight.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Waste water tank, insulated 2
Airbag 2
Alcove window, hinged 2
Caravan coupling 26-46
Hinged window 1
External shower 1
Outside kitchen 10
Outside storage compartment (lowered rear) 59-63
Automatic transmission 10-40
Car radio and CD 2
Oven 14
Skylight (clear glass) 1
Roof rack with aluminium ladder 17
"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1
Swivel console, seat 3
Extractor hood 5
Duomatic switching facility 1
Entrance step 2
Driver's cabin carpet 3
Driver's cabin door 17
Bike rack for 3 bicycles 9
Bike rack for 4 bicycles 10
Roman shades, driver's cabin 3
Flat screen 4-6
Floor warming unit, electrical 9
2
30 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Special equipment
1
6
External gas socket 1
Holder for flat screen 3-5
Lift-tilt skylight (Heki 3) 22
Trumatic C 6002 heater, electric kit 1
Insect screen door 3
Insulation mat for driver's cabin window 2
Air conditioning unit 32-40
Driver's cabin air conditioning unit 30
Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment 20
Awning 300 cm 21
Awning 350 cm 25-35
Awning 400 cm 27-40
Awning 450 cm 32
Awning 500 cm 36
Awning 600 cm 40
Microwave oven 15
Motorcycle rack/bike rack 40
Navigation system 4
Guest bed 5
Radio preparation 1
Reversing camera incl. monitor 5-10
Satellite unit 19-24
Rear mud flaps 2
Service flap 5-8
Safety kit 5
Seat covers in the driver's cabin and living area 3
Solar installation 15
Supports (2 pieces) 6
Tempomat 2
Chain-stitch rug, laid loosely 6-9
Awning light 1
Alde hot-water heater 35
Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit 2
Alde heat exchanger 5
Winter covering for the refrigerator grating 1
Winter comfort package (depending on equipment) 15-65
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
23
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Special equipment
1
6
Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle
heater)
7
Additional pump for the Alde heater 1
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona) 3
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
2
32 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Special equipment
1
6
23
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
17Helpful notes
Chapter overview
This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
road assistance in European countries
traffic rules in European countries
gas supply in European countries
toll regulations in European countries
safe ways to spend the night during travel
camping in winter
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important
equipment for the journey.
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries
Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law
applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following
rules when travelling abroad:
Take the green insurance card with you.
Always register accidents with the police.
Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.
17.2 Help on Europe's roads
The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the
countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your
automobile club or embassy for further information.
In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the
vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Belgium 112
112
TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77
Bulgaria 150
166
UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146
1)
Denmark 112
free of charge
112
free of charge
Falck 79 42 42 42
Germany 112
110
ADAC 22 22 22
1)
Estonia 112
110/112
1)
EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88
1)
Finland 112
112
Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00
France
15/112
1)
17/112
1)
Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22
AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22
2
34 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Greece 112
171/112
1)
ELPA 104 00
Great Britain 112
112
AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/
(08 00) 82 82 82
1)
Ireland
999/112
1)
999/112
1)
AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88
Iceland 112
112
F.I.B 5 11 21 12
Italy
118/112
1)
112
ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00
1)
Croatia
94/112
1)
92/112
1)
HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87
1)
Latvia
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAMB 8 00 00 00
Lithuania
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88
1)
Luxembourg 112
113/112
1)
ACL 2 60 00
Macedonia 194
192
AMSM 196
Montenegro 94
92
AMSCG 9807
Netherlands 112
112
ANWB 08 82 69 28 88
Norway 113
112
NAF 81 00 05 05
Austria
144/112
1)
133/112
1)
ÖAMTC 120
Poland
999/112
1)
997/112
1)
PZM 022 5 32 84 33
Portugal 112
112
ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03
ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01
Romania
961/112
1)
955/112
1)
ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/
(021) 2 22 15 53
1)
Russia 03
02
RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66
Sweden 112
112
M 0 20 91 29 12
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
23
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
Date 03/2007
Specifications without guarantee
17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions
For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m)
of the countries visited most:
Switzerland 144
117/112
1)
TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11
1)
Serbia 94
92
AMSS (011) 19800
Slovakia
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
SATC 1 81 24
Slovenia 112
113
AMZS (1) 9 87/
(003861) 5 30 53 53
1)
Spain 061
112
RACE 9 15 93 33 33
Czech Republic
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
UAMK CR 12 30
Turkey 112
155/112
1)
TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40
Ukraine 03
02
112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12
Hungary
104/112
1)
107/112
1)
MAK
1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44
1)
Cyprus 112
112
AA 02 22 31 31 31
1)
In the mobile communication network
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.
2
36 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
Belgium 2.55 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/120
1)
60/90
1)
120
90
Bulgaria 2.60 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
130
100
Denmark 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80
70
130
80
Germany 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
3.5 t up to
7.5 t
Over
7.5 t
2)
50
50
50
100
80
80
130
3)
100
80
Estonia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Finland 2.60 12 50
80
4)
80
4)
France 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
5)
/-
80
5)
/
100
1) 5)
130
5)
110
5)
Greece 2.50 12 50
90/110
12)
120
Great Brit-
ain
2.55 12 48
96/112
1)
112
Ireland 2.55 12 50
80/100
1)
120
Iceland 2.55 12 50
90
6)
Italy 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/110
1) 7)
80
130
7)
/
150
12) 8)
100
Croatia 2.55 12 50
90/110
1)
130
Latvia 2.50 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/100
12)
80
110
80
Lithuania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Luxem-
bourg
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
9) 7)
75
7)
130
9) 7)
90
7)
Macedo-
nia
2.50 12 50/60 80 80
Montene-
gro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Nether-
lands
2.55
10)
12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
120
80
Norway 2.55 12.40 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80
90
80
23
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
Austria 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
100
70
130
11)
80
Poland 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
1)
70/80
1)
130
80
Portugal 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
12)
80/90
12)
120
13)
110
13)
Romania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80/90
1)
120
110
Russia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
14)
70
110
14)
90
14)
Sweden 2.60
24
15)
Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
70-110
1) 12)
80/90
1)
110
90
Switzer-
land
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over
3.5 t
16)
50
50
80/100
1)
80/100
1)
120
100
Serbia
and Mon-
tenegro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Slovakia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
80
130
80
Slovenia 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Spain 2.55 12 50
90/100
1)
120
Czech Re-
public
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
80
130
80
Turkey 2.50 10 50 80 90
Ukraine 2.50 12 60
90
14)
110
14)
Hungary 2.50 12 Up to 2.5 t
Over 2.5 t
50
50
90/110
1)
70
130
80
Cyprus 2.55 12 50 80 100
1)
On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction
2)
Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph
3)
Recommended speed: 130 km/h
4)
Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehi-
cles up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag,
seat belts on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h
5)
On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h
6)
On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h
7)
In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h
8)
In wet conditions generally 110 km/h
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
2
38 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Date 03/2007
Source: ADAC
Specifications without guarantee
17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries
The following is a list of the European countries in which driving with low beam
is required even during the day.
9)
Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster
than max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways
10)
On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m
11)
Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is
100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn),
A14 (Rheintalautobahn)
12)
According to traffic signs
13)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive
faster than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be
affixed in a clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle
14)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive
faster than 70 km/h
15)
Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water
system
16)
A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles
exceeding 3.5 tons max. permissible weight
Country Conditions
Denmark All year; on all roads
Estonia All year; on all roads
Finland All year; on all roads
Iceland All year; on all roads
Italy All year; only outside of towns
Croatia All year; on all roads
Latvia All year; on all roads
Lithuania From September 1 to April 1; on all roads
Macedonia All year; on all roads
Montenegro All year; on all roads
Norway All year; on all roads
Austria All year; on all roads
Poland From October 1 to March 1; on all roads
Portugal From October 1 to March 1; on all roads
Romania All year; on all roads
Russia All year; only outside of towns
Sweden All year; on all roads
Switzerland All year; on all roads
Slovakia From October 15 to March 15; on all roads
23
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
Specifications without guarantee
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas
Slovenia All year; on all roads
Czech Re-
public
All year; on all roads
Hungary All year; only outside of towns
Country Conditions
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Belgium X X On highway rest areas
max. 24 hours permitted
Bulgaria X X
Denmark X X On streets and squares only up
to 11 hours with a parking disc
Germany X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted. There may be regional
and local limitations
Finland X X Possible with the permission of
the land owner
France X X Permission from the local au-
thorities or the owner of the land
is required. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Greece X X Staying overnight for one night
at designated areas on the na-
tional route Patras-Athens-
Thessaloniki is permitted
Great Britain X X
Ireland X X
Italy X X Staying overnight for one night
at car parks and service stations
is allowed. Observe the local
regulations. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Croatia X X
Luxembourg X X
Macedonia X X
Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and
squares is allowed in some bor-
oughs
2
40 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Specifications without guarantee
Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are-
as and cultivated grounds. Trav-
elling on dirt roads is prohibited
Austria X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted, but not in nature re-
serves. Observe regional and
local restrictions. Generally for-
bidden in Tyrol
Poland X X Requires property owner's per-
mission
Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night
on motorway service stations
and car parks under 10 hours
are tolerated
Romania X X
Russia X X
Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in
the vicinity of houses. Driving on
open fields is prohibited
Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway
rest areas and in some cantons
is tolerated
Serbia and
Montenegro
X X
Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Slovenia X X
Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap-
ply, especially on beaches
Czech Repub-
lic
X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Turkey X X
Ukraine X X
Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately
owned land is permitted only
with police certification
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
24
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
17.6 Gas supply in European countries
General tips Always observe the following instructions:
Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.
Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.
Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas
bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator
to foreign gas bottles.
During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component
(butane does not gas below 0 °C).
Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only
use gas bottles with safety valves.
When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart-
ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries
do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries
Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll
regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country.
Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.
As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be
familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in
Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh
more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged.
Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel
Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe
night in the motorhome.
The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules
are observed:
Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and
skylights.
During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking
areas located along typical vacation routes.
Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease
the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the
parking site.
Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.
When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the
driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within
reach.
In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It
is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign
country. Get information about the connection system in the country you
are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club
or in the trade press.
Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll
collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when
acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).
2
42 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the
journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate
vicinity of windows or doors.
Always lock up the vehicle.
17.9 Tips for winter campers
The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable
as possible.
Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are
often booked up early.
Do not start your trip without winter tyres.
Bring snow chains.
Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you.
Snow and ice may melt.
When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent
freezing.
No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.
Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.
Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois-
ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.
Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid
thermal bridges.
Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".
Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so
that the supply does not run out during the night.
Only operate the gas system using propane gas.
Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the
vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.
Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen
or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal).
When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly.
A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow
quickly becomes a heavy burden.
Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof
to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".
17.10 Travel checklists
The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home
although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.
Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information)
as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com-
mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will
save unnecessary trouble.
Object Object Object
Kitchen area
Wiping cloth Cleansing agent
(detergent)
Salad servers
Mug Dishcloths Chopping board
Turnspit Set of knifes and
forks for grilling
Bowls
24
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Helpful notes
1
7
Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the
dishes
Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the
dishes
Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches
Lighter Spoons Cups
Bottle opener Knifes Plates
Air-tight storage
boxes
Garbage bags Thermos jug
Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots
Forks Stirring spoons Glasses
Bathroom/sanitary
items
Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass
Sanitary items Toilet paper
Living area
Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes
Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit
Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park-
ing guide
Bath shoes Broom Rucksack
Batteries Candles Sleeping bags
Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper
Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes
Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish
Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner
Camping guide Map Flash light
Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife
Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth
Binoculars Neck-supporting
pillow
Clothes pins
Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline
Gas bottle Radio
Vehicle/tools
Waste water con-
tainer
Fabric tape Screwdriver
Adapter socket Watering can for
fresh water
Current-measuring
instrument
CEE adapter Cable reel Step
Wire V-belt Wheel chocks
Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit
Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack
Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-
angle
Object Object Object
2
44 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Helpful notes
1
7
Replacement wa-
ter pump
Luster terminals Warning sign
Hammer Loops Warning vest
Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard
warning light
Gas filling adapter Hose clips
Gas tube Snow chains (win-
ter)
Outside
Stay rope Camping table Lock
Bellows Luggage racks String
Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten-
ing ropes
Documents
List of addresses Registration book Identity card
Registration confir-
mation(s)
Driving licence Passport
Allergy certificate Green insurance
card
Writ of protection
Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi-
cate
Vignette/toll card
Instruction leaflets
for medicines
Credit card Visa
Object Object Object
24
5M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Inde
x
12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
For Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 125
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124, 125
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124, 125
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 131, 132
Power cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 125
240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
A
Access ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Access ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Access ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Accessories, fitting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Additional equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Add-on parts see special equipment
. . . . . . . . . 20
Air conditioning unit
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Adjusting air current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
LED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Manuals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Automatic power selection (AES)
. . . . . . . . . . 168
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
B
Backrest adjustment mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Basic equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic menu, calling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 123, 130
Battery capacity alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Battery cut-off switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Battery defect message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Battery monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118
Battery
see starter battery and living area battery
. . . . 110
Battery selector switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 118
Battery separation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128
Battery, wardrobe light, changing
. . . . . . . . . . 207
Beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bike rack
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Travelling with a loaded bike rack
. . . . . . . . 34
Blind, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Blind, skylight with snap latch
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Blind, window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Boiler (Alde)
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Safety/drainage valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Summer operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
I
ndex
2
46 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Bonnet
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Brakes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 217
Braking system, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . 217
Branch block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Breakdown services in Europe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ceiling lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Halogen spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206
Spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . 206
Wardrobe light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Butane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 102
C
Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Camping gas bottles, use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 102
Camping in winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cap, water drain neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Capacity of the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Caravan coupling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Carpet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Driver's cabin insulation mat
. . . . . . . . . . . 191
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Furniture surfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . 189
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
In the winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Net curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Seat belt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Sink
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Synthetic parts, interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Teflon coverings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Toilets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Underbody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Upholstery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Carpet, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Ceiling lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Central seating group
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 93
Changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Charging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 195
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
For the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Initial start-up after temporary lay-up
. . . . .197
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Children's beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86, 88, 89
Circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Circulating pump,
setting the rotational speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141
Cleaning see care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Closed circuit current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
On the double acrylic glass pane
. . . . . . . . .65
On the screwed connections in the floor
. . . .65
Condensation water see condensation
. . . . . . . .65
Connecting cable see power cable
. . . . . . . . . .132
Conventional load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 62
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Conversion door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60
Conversion door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
24
7M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Inde
x
Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Curtains, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
D
Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65
Date, setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Defrosters, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dimensions, permissible
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Discharging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Displays
Battery voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128
Current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Waste water tank level
. . . . . . . 120, 123, 130
Water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 123, 130
Disposal
Household waste
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sewage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Waste water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Doors
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Double floor, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Drain cock, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Drain neck, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Driver's cabin insulation mat, care
. . . . . . . . . 191
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Driver's door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Driver's door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Driver's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . 43, 44
Driving speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Driving the motorhome
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Duomatic switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
During the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
E
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
240 V connection, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . 218
Entrance step, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . 217
Explanation of terms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lighting, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Electrically adjustable external mirrors
. . . . . . . 48
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 53
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pushing in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Environmental tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Exterior lighting
Checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
External connection see 240 V connection
. . . . 55
External flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Flap lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 64
External gas connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
External mirrors, electrically adjustable
Adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Mirror heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Filter, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
F
Fault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Filling level of the water tank, displaying
. . . . . 130
Filling the tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fire
Behaviour in the event of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Extinguishing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire risks, avoidance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fixed bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
I
ndex
2
48 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Fixed table
Moving in a crossways direction
. . . . . . . . . 80
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . 80
Flap lock
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
Elliptical-shaped
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
With recessed handle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Flat screen, positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Floor warming unit, electrical
Overload protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fluorescent tubes, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Folding mechanism, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . 85
Forced ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65
Freezer compartment door locking
mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . . 174
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fresh water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 175
Fresh water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Front bench seat, sleeping
conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 97, 98
Front passenger's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . 43, 44
Front seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . . 99
Fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Furniture flaps, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Furniture surfaces, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fuse box see 240 V automatic
circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fuses
12 V fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
240 V fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 136
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
For the Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse
. . . . . . . 132
G
Gas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102
Gas bottles
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102
Gas connection, external
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Gas consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Gas cooker
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 137
Gas odour
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101, 220
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 163
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Gas supply in European countries
. . . . . . . . . .241
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Defect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101, 220
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 101
Switching automatics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Gas tube, check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 102
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Guarantee
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee certificate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
H
Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Handbrake
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Applying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Handling of tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Headrests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Heat exchanger (Alde)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Heat exchangers, heater, replacement
. . . . . . .137
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . .138
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141
Heat exchangers, replacement
. . . . . . . . . .137
24
9M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Inde
x
Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Initial start-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Heater for the waste water tank
and waste water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Heater, external mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Heki skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Help on Europe's roads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
High rate of gas consumption
. . . . . . 22, 101, 220
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . . . 189
Hinged skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Locking in ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Hinged window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Continuous ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Hot air distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hot-air heater
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 142
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Hot-water heater
240 V electrical operation, selecting
. . . . . 145
Auxiliary circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fluid level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Gas and 240 V electrical operation,
selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Gas operation, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Heat exchanger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heater, switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heating fluid, topping up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Heating system, bleeding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Maintenance work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Operating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Rotational speed, circulating pump
. . . . . . 147
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
I
Independent vehicle heater
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply
. . . . . . 121, 125
Indicator lamp, 240 V power supply
. . . . . 121, 125
Indicator lamp, toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185
Information stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Initial start-up
After temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
After winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Inner door, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Insect screen door
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Folding in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Insect screen, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Insect screen, conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Insect screen, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Insect screen, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Insect screen, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Insect screen, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Inspection records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inspection work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Interior lighting
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
I
ndex
2
50 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
L
Ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Ladder, rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 202
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lay-up
Temporary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
LCD display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Leakage water inside the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lift-off table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Light switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lighting
Lamps, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Lights see bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Living area battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121, 123, 130
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Charging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . 124
Discharging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Discharging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . 124
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 219
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . .119, 122, 128
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Bike rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Double floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Roof rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load rack for roof loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load see also payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lock
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
External flap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Low beam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
M
Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . . 202
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . .202
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Independent vehicle heater
. . . . . . . . . . . .201
Mass in ready-to-drive condition
. . . . . . . . . .27, 29
Maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . .27, 29
Mechanical steady legs
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Microwave oven
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
N
Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
No gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Nose weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
O
Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Off-load voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Oil level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Operating modes
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . .152
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 158
Hot-air heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 141
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168, 170
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . . .107
Oven
see gas cooker or gas oven
. . . . . . 161, 162, 163
Overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Folding mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Overloading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
P
Panel (DT 220) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Basic menu, calling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Date, setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Defroster, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . .128
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
25
1M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Inde
x
Filling level of the water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
LCD display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Software version panel, displaying
. . . . . . 128
Tank heater, switching on and off
. . . . . . . 130
Time, setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Water pump, switching on and off
. . . . . . . 130
Panel (IT 20-3)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Filling level of the water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Panel (IT 992)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Filling level of the water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Panel see also displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 122
Payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Composition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Example calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29
Payload see also load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Permissible gross weight
see maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . 26
Personal equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power cable for the 240 V connection
. . . . . . . 132
Propane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 102
Pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PVC-floor covering, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
R
Rear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 166
12 V operation,
switching on/off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 172
240 V operation,
switching on/off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 171, 172
Change-over between energy sources
. . . 169
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173
Frame heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gas operation, switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Gas operation, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168, 170
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Refrigerating temperature control
. . . . . . . 169
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223, 224
Ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Refrigerator door locking mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . 173, 174
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . 166
Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote control, air conditioning unit
(Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Risk of frost damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 175, 181
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Notes for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Roman shade, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Roman shade, driver's cabin
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Roman shade, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Roman shade, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Roman shade, window of conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Roman shade, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Roman shade, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Roof load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof rack, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
I
ndex
2
52 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Roof rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Round seating group,
sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
S
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gas bottles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 101
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety net, bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Safety net, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Safety net, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Safety/drainage valve boiler
. . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Sanitary fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Seat belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fastening correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Seating arrangement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seating groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Seats, rotating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Serial number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Shower
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Sink, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Skylight with snap latch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Skylights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 74
Sleeping conversion
Central seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . .91, 92, 93
Front bench seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 97, 98
Front seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Round seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 64
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sliding window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Snow chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software version panel, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . 128
Spare parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Spare wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Underneath the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Spare wheel support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Marking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Weight details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Speed limits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Spotlight
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Turning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Starter battery
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . 119, 122, 128
Staying overnight
Away from camping areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . .239
During travel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Supports see steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Suspension table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . .78
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Reducing size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . . . . . .106
Swivel table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . .79
Fastening to the floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Symbols
For instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 137
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living
areas, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
T
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Table, fixed
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . .81
Table-top, folding to the side
. . . . . . . . . . . .81
Tank alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Tank heater, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . .130
25
3M
otorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06EN
Inde
x
Tank lid see fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Teflon coverings, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Television
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 82
Positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Storing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Swiveling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Thetford cassette, retaining clip
. . . . . . . . . . . 187
Thetford toilet
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Water tank, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Time, setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Toilet cassette
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Toll regulations in European countries
. . . . . . 241
Total discharge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Traffic rules in foreign countries
. . . . . . . . . . . 233
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 220)
. . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Travel checklists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Travel cots suitable for children
. . . . 85, 86, 88, 89
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . 225
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . 226
Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Boiler (Alde)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Braking system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Furniture flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Hot-air heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Inner door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Microwave oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223, 224
Starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Water supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
TV cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tyre change see changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . 213
Tyre specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Excessive wear
. . . . . . . . . . .21, 38, 211, 215
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Handling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Load-carrying capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tyre pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Tyre selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
U
Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Unladen weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Upholstery, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
V
Vacuum toilet
Emptying valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Indicator lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Putting into operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
I
ndex
2
54 Motorcaravan - 01-08 - DET-0033-06E
N
Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Converting into a shower cubicle
. . . . . . . . 188
Converting into toilet compartment
. . . . . . 188
Vehicle identification plate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Vehicle manuals and documents
. . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vehicle, washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Volume of waste water, displaying
. . . . . . 120, 123
Volume of water, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . 120, 123
W
Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Warning stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Washer fluid, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
. . . . . . . 189
Waste gas vent on the right hand side
of the vehicle.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 155
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . .120, 123, 130
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Waste water tap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 180
Switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Water pump, switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Water supply
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Water system
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fresh water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Water tank
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . .120, 123, 130
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Water, draining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Water tank see also water system
. . . . . . . . . . 176
Weatherproof guarantee
Conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inspection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inspection stamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Weight details for special equipment
. . . . . . . .229
Wheel chocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Wheel rim size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Wheel rim type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Window winders, electrical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Window, conversion door
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
Wind-up skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Winter care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Writing and reading rest
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
1

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Dethleffs-2008-Motorhome

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Dethleffs 2008 Motorhome bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Dethleffs 2008 Motorhome in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 4,34 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Dethleffs 2008 Motorhome

Dethleffs 2008 Motorhome Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 262 pagina's

Dethleffs 2008 Motorhome Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 276 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info